1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 European Computer Modern
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12907 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12926 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12927 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 community in order to replace
12962 as the default font.
12963 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12964 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 One difference is improved kerning.
12989 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 If you do not like the look of
12998 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13019 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13020 \begin_inset space ~
13023 serif and typewriter fonts,
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13044 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13061 \begin_inset space \space{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13085 but you can also select your own.
13086 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 The differences between roman,
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 fonts are explained in section
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13108 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13124 was originally designed for newspapers.
13125 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13126 into the small newspaper columns.
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13152 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13157 depends on the class you are using.
13158 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13162 Note that the font size is the
13167 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13168 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13169 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13170 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13207 serif or typewriter.
13212 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13222 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13230 LaTeX font encoding
13232 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13261 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13262 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13272 Use Old Style Figures
13276 Use True Small Caps
13279 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13282 Use Old Style Figures
13284 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13286 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13294 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13298 Use True Small Caps
13300 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13301 of scaled capitals.
13302 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13303 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13311 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13312 a font to display the script characters.
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 \begin_inset Index idx
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13333 So this has no effect for the document language
13349 \begin_layout Standard
13352 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13354 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13355 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 \begin_inset Index idx
13364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 packages ! microtype
13374 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13376 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13380 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13392 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13397 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13398 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13400 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13405 dialog, see section
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13412 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13424 \begin_layout Subsection
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13429 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13430 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13432 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13433 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13434 choose a math font in the dialog
13436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13440 \begin_inset Index idx
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 Document ! Settings
13450 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13451 automatically selects a math font.
13452 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13453 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13473 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13474 document font is available.
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 Note that the math font will not be used for
13482 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13488 or by the insertion of the command
13495 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13500 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13501 while the math characters do not.
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13506 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13522 in the document font settings.
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13527 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13528 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13529 font (in most cases
13530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 \begin_inset space ~
13542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13545 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13546 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13554 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13566 \begin_layout Subsection
13567 Using Different Character Styles
13568 \begin_inset Index idx
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13578 \begin_inset Index idx
13581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13592 automatically changes the character style for certain
13593 paragraph environments.
13595 supports two character styles,
13604 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13613 style, do one of the following:
13616 \begin_layout Itemize
13617 click on the toolbar button
13626 \begin_layout Itemize
13627 use the key binding
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 These commands are all toggles.
13642 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13645 \begin_layout Standard
13646 One typically uses the
13650 style for proper names.
13652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13659 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13668 A more widely used character style is the
13673 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13680 \begin_layout Itemize
13681 clicking on the toolbar button
13690 \begin_layout Itemize
13691 using the keybindings
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13705 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13707 use a different font.
13710 \begin_layout Standard
13711 We've been using the
13715 style all over the place in this document.
13716 Here's one more example:
13719 \begin_layout Quotation
13722 Do not overuse character styles!
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13727 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13728 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13729 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13747 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13753 arg "dialog-show character"
13759 \begin_layout Subsection
13760 Fine-Tuning with the
13765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13767 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13772 \begin_inset Index idx
13775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13787 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13788 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13789 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13790 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13791 from ordinary dialog.
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13795 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13796 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13797 \begin_inset Newline newline
13800 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13801 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13805 To use custom character styles, open the
13807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13809 \begin_inset space ~
13812 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13815 dialog or press the toolbar button
13818 arg "dialog-show character"
13822 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13823 font property that you can choose.
13824 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13832 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13837 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13838 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13839 environments all at once.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13858 \begin_layout Labeling
13859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13873 The possible options are:
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13883 This is the Roman font family.
13884 Normally a serif font.
13885 It's also the default family.
13895 \begin_layout Labeling
13896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13907 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 This is the Typewriter font family.
13933 arg "font-typewriter"
13942 \begin_layout Labeling
13943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13948 This corresponds to the print weight.
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Medium font series.
13960 It's also the default series.
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Bold font series.
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13990 As the name implies.
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is the Upright font shape.
14002 It's also the default shape.
14005 \begin_layout Labeling
14006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 s the Italic font shape
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This is the Slanted font shape
14036 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14037 , this is different from italic).
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14045 \begin_inset space ~
14052 This is the Small caps font shape
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14065 Alters the text color.
14066 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14075 , which means that the document default color set in
14077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14084 \begin_inset space ~
14089 is used, you can choose between
14166 \begin_inset Index idx
14169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14178 \begin_layout Labeling
14179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14185 the language of the document.
14186 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14187 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14189 \begin_inset Newline newline
14192 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14194 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14195 When using the spell checking (see section
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14202 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14206 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14209 \begin_layout Labeling
14210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 Alters the size of the font.
14216 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14217 proportional to the document font size.
14218 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14219 the details, but a general description of what
14225 \begin_layout Labeling
14226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14247 arg "font-size tiny"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14331 arg "font-size small"
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14352 It's also the default size.
14356 arg "font-size normal"
14362 \begin_layout Labeling
14363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14384 arg "font-size large"
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 arg "font-size larger"
14418 \begin_layout Labeling
14419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 arg "font-size largest"
14446 \begin_layout Labeling
14447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size huge"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size giant"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14508 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size increase"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 arg "font-size decrease"
14567 \begin_layout Standard
14572 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14573 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14575 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14576 — use those instead.
14577 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14580 \begin_layout Labeling
14581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14586 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14591 \begin_layout Labeling
14592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 This is text with emphasize on
14602 This might seem like the same as
14606 , but it is actually a bit different.
14612 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14614 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 This is text with Underbar on.
14631 arg "font-underline"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14642 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14643 when you could not change fonts.
14644 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14645 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14646 because some people
14650 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 \begin_inset space ~
14665 This is text with Double underbar on.
14671 arg "font-underunderline"
14675 \begin_inset Newline newline
14678 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14679 about double underbar.
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 \begin_inset space ~
14694 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14700 arg "font-underwave"
14704 \begin_inset Newline newline
14707 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14708 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14723 This is text with Strikeout on.
14729 arg "font-strikeout"
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14736 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14737 changed in the meantime.
14740 \begin_layout Labeling
14741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14752 This is text with Cross out on.
14755 \begin_inset Newline newline
14758 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14761 \begin_layout Labeling
14762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14769 This is text with Noun on.
14776 , this is a logical attribute.
14777 Normally it's equivalent to
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14791 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14804 arg "dialog-show character"
14807 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14808 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14811 arg "textstyle-apply"
14815 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14819 \begin_layout Standard
14820 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14827 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14828 (suppose you just set the shape to
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14847 \begin_inset space ~
14859 \begin_layout Standard
14860 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_layout Itemize
14886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14929 \begin_inset Note Note
14932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 For more on phantoms see section
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14940 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14950 \begin_inset Newline newline
14956 \begin_layout Itemize
14961 fonts use characters with serifs.
14962 These are the small
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14971 The following example shows the difference:
14972 \begin_inset Newline newline
14976 \begin_inset Newline newline
14981 text without serifs
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14987 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14988 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14995 \begin_layout Itemize
15000 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15001 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15002 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15013 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15014 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15022 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15023 the property to be removed.
15024 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15025 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15026 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15044 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15045 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15057 \begin_inset space ~
15062 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15073 If you, for example, set
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 \begin_inset space ~
15097 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15110 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15111 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15114 \begin_layout Section
15115 Printing and Previewing
15118 \begin_layout Subsection
15122 \begin_layout Standard
15123 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15124 using \SpecialChar LyX
15125 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15126 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15127 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15128 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15130 Additional Features
15135 \begin_layout Standard
15137 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15140 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15141 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15142 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15145 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15146 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15147 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15148 to turn your writing into printable output.
15149 This happens in two stages:
15152 \begin_layout Enumerate
15153 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15154 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15156 a file with the extension,
15157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_layout Enumerate
15172 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15173 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15174 to use the commands in the
15178 file to produce printable output.
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15182 Output file formats
15183 \begin_inset Index idx
15186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15195 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15203 Simple text (ASCII)
15204 \begin_inset Index idx
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15208 File formats ! ASCII
15216 \begin_layout Standard
15217 This file type has the extension
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15230 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15241 \begin_layout Standard
15242 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15244 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15245 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15247 \begin_inset space ~
15253 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15254 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15255 bibliography (section
15256 \begin_inset space ~
15260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15262 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15267 If your document includes such material, use
15269 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15270 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15272 \begin_inset space ~
15276 \begin_inset space ~
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15298 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15299 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15305 \begin_inset Index idx
15308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15309 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15318 \begin_layout Standard
15319 This file type has the extension
15320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15335 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15336 -Errors or to process it manually
15337 with console commands.
15338 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15340 's temporary directory whenever you
15341 view or export your document.
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15346 -file using the menu
15348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15349 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15354 export variants are explained in section
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15361 reference "subsec:Export"
15368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15370 \begin_inset Index idx
15373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 This file type has the extension
15384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15405 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15406 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15412 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15413 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15414 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15415 when you view the DVI.
15416 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15419 \begin_layout Standard
15420 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15422 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15423 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15429 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15437 The latter option uses the program
15439 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15445 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15448 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15449 font access (see section
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15461 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15462 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15473 File formats ! PostScript
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 This file type has the extension
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 PostScript was developed by the company
15499 as a printer language.
15500 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15502 PostScript can be seen as a
15503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15506 programming language
15507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15510 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15527 packages ! pstricks
15537 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 Encapsulated PostScript
15546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 (EPS, file extension
15550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15562 As \SpecialChar LyX
15563 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15564 convert them in the background to EPS.
15565 If, for example, you have 50
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15569 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15571 \begin_inset space ~
15574 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15575 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15577 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15578 EPS to avoid this problem.
15581 \begin_layout Standard
15582 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15584 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15585 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15593 \begin_inset Index idx
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 \begin_inset Index idx
15606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 \begin_layout Standard
15616 This file type has the extension
15617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 Portable Document Format
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15641 was derived from PostScript.
15642 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15652 looks exactly the same.
15655 \begin_layout Standard
15656 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15660 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 (JPG, file extension
15665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15692 Portable Network Graphics
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 (PNG, file extension
15697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15710 converts them in the
15711 background to one of these formats.
15712 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15713 will slow down your workflow.
15714 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15726 \begin_layout Description
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15731 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15735 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15738 \begin_layout Description
15740 \begin_inset space ~
15747 ) This uses the program
15749 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15752 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15755 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15758 is a new engine, derived from
15762 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15763 access (see section
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15770 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15775 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15776 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15781 \begin_layout Description
15783 \begin_inset space ~
15790 ) This uses the program
15795 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15802 font access (see section
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15809 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15814 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15815 vertically written Japanese.
15818 \begin_layout Description
15820 \begin_inset space ~
15823 (cropped) This is the same as
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15831 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15832 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15833 to generate good-looking
15834 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15837 \begin_layout Description
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15842 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15846 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15850 \begin_layout Description
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15855 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15859 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15860 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15864 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15865 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15868 \begin_layout Standard
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15881 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15882 works without problems.
15883 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15884 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15901 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15911 \begin_inset Index idx
15914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15915 FileFormats ! XHTML
15921 \begin_inset Index idx
15924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15933 \begin_layout Standard
15934 This file type has the extension
15935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15947 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15948 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15949 When \SpecialChar LyX
15950 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15951 suitable for the purpose.
15952 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15958 between different formats, which are described in section
15960 Math Output in XHTML
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15973 \begin_layout Standard
15974 XHTML output remains
15975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15982 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15983 features are supported yet.
15987 and the World Wide Web
15991 Additional Features
15993 manual, for more information.
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15999 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16006 \begin_layout Subsection
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16022 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16031 or use the toolbar button
16038 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16039 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16046 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16050 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16052 \begin_inset space ~
16056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16058 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16063 Further output formats can be selected via
16065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16066 View (Other Formats)
16068 or the toolbar button
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16079 viewer window using the menu
16081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16087 Update (Other Formats)
16092 \begin_layout Standard
16093 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16096 To have a real output, export your document.
16099 \begin_layout Section
16100 A few Words about Typography
16101 \begin_inset Index idx
16104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16113 \begin_layout Subsection
16114 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16115 \begin_inset Index idx
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16125 \begin_inset Index idx
16128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 In \SpecialChar LyX
16140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16151 symbol comes in four variants: the
16168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16174 \begin_layout Standard
16175 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16185 height_special "totalheight"
16190 backgroundcolor "none"
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Tabular
16195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16200 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 system key combination
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 and the em dash with
16312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 is the Mac label for the right
16334 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16338 \begin_inset space ~
16341 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16354 and 2014 for the en dash).
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 system key combination or
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16469 \begin_layout Standard
16470 Dashes can also be inserted with
16472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16477 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16494 mode and has a length of its own.
16495 Here are some examples:
16498 \begin_layout Enumerate
16499 line- and page-breaks
16500 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16510 \begin_layout Enumerate
16512 \begin_inset space ~
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16538 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16553 \begin_layout Standard
16555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16557 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16558 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 Dashes and line breaks
16568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16570 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16578 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16582 \begin_layout Itemize
16583 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16584 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16585 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16588 \begin_layout Itemize
16589 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16593 \begin_layout Itemize
16594 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16595 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 In \SpecialChar LyX
16600 , line breaks after en-dashes and em-dashes are only allowed (without
16601 manual intervention), if the option
16603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16606 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16608 is selected (this is the default in \SpecialChar LyX
16613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16614 In this case, the dashes are output as
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16630 , respectively, when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16632 The \SpecialChar TeX
16633 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16634 by an optional line break.
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16646 \begin_layout Enumerate
16647 This results in optional line breaks after
16652 Unwanted line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16659 Prevent Hyphenation
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16674 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16680 in \SpecialChar TeX
16686 \begin_layout Itemize
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16692 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16702 height_special "totalheight"
16707 backgroundcolor "none"
16710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16719 \begin_layout Itemize
16720 With spaced en dashes
16721 \begin_inset space ~
16725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16729 in British English and generally recommended by
16731 The Elements of Typographic Style
16734 \begin_inset space ~
16737 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16740 \begin_layout Itemize
16744 \begin_inset space ~
16747 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16748 \begin_inset space ~
16751 – sont très utiles.
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16770 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16775 \begin_inset space ~
16778 – in contrast to an overfull line
16779 \begin_inset space ~
16782 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16787 \begin_layout Enumerate
16788 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16799 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16802 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16803 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16808 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16811 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16820 \begin_layout Enumerate
16836 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16840 \begin_layout Standard
16843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16844 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16845 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16846 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16848 has not been selected, you can insert optional line breaks via the menu
16851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16852 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16853 Optional line break
16858 \begin_layout Itemize
16859 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16860 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16865 \begin_layout Standard
16866 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16871 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16877 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16879 \begin_inset space ~
16882 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16884 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16889 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16890 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16893 \begin_inset space ~
16896 2.3 provides the aforementioned option
16898 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16907 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16909 \begin_inset space ~
16913 \begin_inset Newline newline
16916 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16920 \begin_layout Itemize
16921 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16923 \begin_inset space ~
16926 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16928 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16930 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16934 \begin_layout Itemize
16935 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16937 \begin_inset space ~
16940 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16941 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16944 \begin_layout Itemize
16945 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16946 documents that follow literal
16947 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16949 \begin_inset space ~
16953 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16954 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16956 \begin_inset space ~
16959 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16962 \begin_layout Subsection
16964 \begin_inset Index idx
16967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16976 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16983 \begin_layout Standard
16984 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16985 but automatically in the output.
16986 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16992 \begin_inset Index idx
16995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17002 following the rules of the document language.
17005 \begin_layout Standard
17007 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17011 font and with unusual constructs, like
17012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17020 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17021 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17022 This is done with the menu
17024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17025 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17027 \begin_inset space ~
17033 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17035 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17039 \begin_layout Standard
17040 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17041 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17052 would then see the hyphen
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17060 as a hyphenation possibility.
17061 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17062 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17066 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17069 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17071 Prevent Hyphenation
17076 \begin_inset space ~
17084 \begin_layout Subsection
17086 \begin_inset Index idx
17089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17099 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17102 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17109 \begin_layout Standard
17110 When \SpecialChar LyX
17111 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17112 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17114 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17120 appropriate amount of space.
17121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17124 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17126 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17127 gets after another word.
17130 \begin_layout Standard
17131 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17132 not work in all cases.
17134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17145 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17146 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 Here are some examples of
17154 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17157 \begin_layout Itemize
17162 \begin_layout Itemize
17167 \begin_layout Standard
17168 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17171 \begin_layout Itemize
17173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17177 this is too much space!
17180 \begin_layout Itemize
17185 \begin_layout Standard
17186 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17189 \begin_layout Standard
17190 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17193 \begin_layout Enumerate
17197 \begin_inset space ~
17202 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17203 \begin_inset space ~
17207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17209 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17214 \begin_inset Index idx
17217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17218 Spaces ! inter-word
17226 \begin_layout Enumerate
17230 \begin_inset space ~
17235 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17236 \begin_inset space ~
17240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17242 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17247 \begin_inset Index idx
17250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17259 \begin_layout Enumerate
17263 \begin_inset space ~
17267 \begin_inset space ~
17271 \begin_inset space ~
17278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17280 \begin_inset space ~
17285 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17286 This function is also bound to
17289 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17299 \begin_layout Itemize
17301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17305 \begin_inset space \space{}
17308 this is too much space!
17311 \begin_layout Itemize
17312 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17316 \begin_layout Standard
17317 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17318 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17320 will take care of this.
17323 \begin_layout Standard
17324 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17328 \begin_inset space ~
17334 feature described in the section
17336 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17341 Additional Features
17346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17348 \begin_inset Index idx
17351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17352 Typography ! Quotation marks
17358 \begin_inset Index idx
17361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17362 Quotation marks | see
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17392 \begin_layout Standard
17394 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17395 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17396 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17406 The keyboard character,
17410 , generates this automatically.
17413 \begin_layout Standard
17414 You can specify what character the
17418 key produces by using the submenu
17424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17428 \begin_inset Index idx
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 Document ! Settings
17437 dialog and switching the
17441 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17442 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17444 \begin_inset space ~
17450 \begin_layout Labeling
17451 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17463 \begin_inset space ~
17467 \begin_inset space ~
17471 \begin_inset Quotes els
17475 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17489 \begin_inset Quotes els
17493 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17496 quotation marks (as common, e.
17497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17503 \begin_layout Labeling
17504 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17507 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17511 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17515 \begin_inset space ~
17519 \begin_inset space ~
17523 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17527 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17533 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17537 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17541 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17545 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17548 quotation marks (as common, e.
17549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17555 \begin_layout Labeling
17556 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17559 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17563 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17567 \begin_inset space ~
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17575 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17579 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17585 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17589 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17593 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17597 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17600 quotation marks (as common, e.
17601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17607 \begin_layout Labeling
17608 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17611 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17615 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17619 \begin_inset space ~
17623 \begin_inset space ~
17627 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17631 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17637 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17641 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17645 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17649 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17652 quotation marks (as common, e.
17653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17659 \begin_layout Labeling
17660 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17663 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17667 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17671 \begin_inset space ~
17675 \begin_inset space ~
17679 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17683 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17689 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17693 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17697 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17701 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17704 quotation marks (as common, e.
17705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17708 g., in Switzerland)
17711 \begin_layout Labeling
17712 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17715 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17719 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17727 \begin_inset space ~
17731 \begin_inset Quotes als
17735 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17741 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17745 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17749 \begin_inset Quotes als
17753 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17756 quotation marks (as common, e.
17757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17763 \begin_layout Labeling
17764 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17767 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17771 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17775 \begin_inset space ~
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17783 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17787 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17793 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17797 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17801 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17805 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17808 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17811 \begin_layout Labeling
17812 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17815 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17819 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17823 \begin_inset space ~
17827 \begin_inset space ~
17831 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17835 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17841 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17845 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17849 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17853 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17856 quotation marks (as common, e.
17857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17860 g., in Great Britain)
17863 \begin_layout Labeling
17864 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17867 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17871 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17875 \begin_inset space ~
17879 \begin_inset space ~
17883 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17887 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17893 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17897 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17901 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17905 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17908 quotation marks (as common, e.
17909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17915 \begin_layout Labeling
17916 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17919 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17923 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17931 \begin_inset space ~
17935 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17939 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17945 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17949 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17953 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17957 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17960 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17965 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17966 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17967 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17968 the inner marks differ).
17976 \begin_layout Labeling
17977 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17980 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17984 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17988 \begin_inset space ~
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17996 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18000 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18006 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18010 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18014 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18018 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18021 quotation marks (as common, e.
18022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18028 \begin_layout Labeling
18029 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18032 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18036 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18040 \begin_inset space ~
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18052 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18058 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18062 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18066 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18070 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18073 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18076 \begin_layout Labeling
18077 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18078 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18086 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18110 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18114 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18118 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18122 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18126 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18129 quotation marks (as common, e.
18130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18138 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18139 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18147 \begin_layout Labeling
18148 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18149 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18157 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18163 \begin_inset space ~
18167 \begin_inset space ~
18173 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18181 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18185 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18189 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18193 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18197 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18200 quotation marks (as common, e.
18201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18204 g., in North Korea and China)
18208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18209 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18210 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18218 \begin_layout Standard
18219 Inner quotation marks
18223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18224 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18225 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18226 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18234 does not necessarily mean
18235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18243 This is why we call them
18244 \begin_inset Quotes els
18248 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18264 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18266 \begin_inset Quotes els
18270 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18273 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18276 arg "quote-insert inner"
18281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18287 \begin_layout Standard
18288 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18289 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18290 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18291 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18292 If you check the setting
18294 Use dynamic quotation marks
18298 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18299 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18302 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18303 they appear in a special color).
18304 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18305 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18310 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18313 \begin_layout Standard
18314 Individual quotation marks (i.
18315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18318 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18319 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18323 \begin_layout Subsection
18325 \begin_inset Index idx
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 Typography ! Ligatures
18335 \begin_inset Index idx
18338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18369 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18376 \begin_layout Standard
18377 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18378 print them as single characters.
18379 These groups are known as
18384 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18385 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18387 Here are the standard ligatures:
18390 \begin_layout Itemize
18394 \begin_layout Itemize
18398 \begin_layout Itemize
18402 \begin_layout Itemize
18406 \begin_layout Itemize
18410 \begin_layout Standard
18411 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18414 \begin_layout Standard
18415 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18416 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18440 To break a ligature, use
18442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18443 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18445 \begin_inset space ~
18452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18480 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_layout Subsection
18490 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18492 \begin_inset Index idx
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18505 \begin_layout Standard
18508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18509 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18513 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18516 \begin_layout Description
18518 The name of the game.
18521 \begin_layout Description
18523 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18527 \begin_layout Description
18529 The \SpecialChar TeX
18530 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18534 \begin_layout Description
18535 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18536 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18540 \begin_layout Standard
18541 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18547 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18555 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18556 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18557 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18558 converges to the number
18559 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18562 : The actual version is
18563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18571 , the previous one was
18572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18583 \begin_layout Subsection
18585 \begin_inset Index idx
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18598 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18599 space between two words.
18600 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18610 for units use the menu
18612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18613 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18615 \begin_inset space ~
18623 arg "space-insert thin"
18629 \begin_layout Standard
18630 Here is an example to show the differences:
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18634 \begin_inset Tabular
18635 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18636 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18637 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18638 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 \begin_inset space ~
18649 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 space between number and unit
18668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18677 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18689 half space between number and unit
18702 \begin_layout Subsection
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18717 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18719 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18720 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18721 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18722 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18723 These bits of text became known as
18734 \begin_layout Standard
18735 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18736 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18737 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18738 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18739 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18740 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18741 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18742 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18743 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18744 \begin_inset Newline newline
18752 \begin_inset Newline newline
18760 \begin_inset Newline newline
18763 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18764 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18765 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18767 \begin_inset space ~
18771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18773 key "latexcompanion"
18779 \begin_inset space ~
18783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18790 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18791 's page break mechanism.
18794 \begin_layout Chapter
18795 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18798 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18805 \begin_layout Standard
18806 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18809 \begin_inset space ~
18815 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18818 \begin_layout Section
18820 \begin_inset Index idx
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18839 \begin_layout Standard
18841 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18844 \begin_layout Description
18847 \begin_inset space ~
18850 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18851 \begin_inset Newline newline
18855 \begin_inset Note Note
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18867 \begin_layout Description
18868 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18869 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18870 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18874 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18876 \begin_inset space ~
18882 \begin_inset Newline newline
18886 \begin_inset Note Comment
18889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18899 \begin_layout Description
18901 \begin_inset space ~
18904 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18905 set in the document settings under
18907 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18909 \begin_inset space ~
18915 \begin_inset Newline newline
18919 \begin_inset Newline newline
18923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18932 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18933 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18938 of a comment that appears in the output.
18944 \begin_inset Newline newline
18948 \begin_inset Newline newline
18951 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18954 \begin_layout Standard
18955 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18967 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18970 \begin_layout Section
18972 \begin_inset Index idx
18975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18984 name "sec:Footnotes"
18991 \begin_layout Standard
18993 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18999 or the toolbar button
19002 arg "footnote-insert"
19014 \begin_inset Graphics
19015 filename clipart/footnote.png
19024 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19025 's representation of your footnote.
19035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19054 label, the box will
19058 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19059 Clicking on the box label again will close
19072 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19073 and click on the footnote
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 Here is an example footnote:
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19108 position where the footnote box is placed.
19109 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19110 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19111 according to the document class.
19113 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19114 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19120 ey are described in the
19123 \begin_inset space ~
19131 \begin_layout Section
19133 \begin_inset Index idx
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19145 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19152 \begin_layout Standard
19153 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19155 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19159 \begin_inset space ~
19164 or the toolbar button
19167 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19193 appearing within your text.
19194 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19195 's representation of your margin
19204 \begin_layout Standard
19205 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19209 \begin_inset Marginal
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 This is a marginal note.
19222 \begin_layout Standard
19223 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19224 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19225 pages, right on odd pages.
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19229 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19232 \begin_inset space ~
19240 \begin_inset space ~
19248 \begin_layout Section
19249 Graphics and Images
19250 \begin_inset Index idx
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19260 \begin_inset Index idx
19263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19272 name "sec:Graphics"
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19281 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19284 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19293 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19296 \begin_layout Standard
19297 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19302 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19303 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19305 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19306 \begin_inset space ~
19310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19312 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19319 \begin_layout Standard
19324 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19325 of the image in the output.
19326 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19330 \begin_inset space ~
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19347 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_inset space ~
19356 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19357 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19365 \begin_layout Standard
19369 \begin_inset space ~
19373 \begin_inset space ~
19378 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19379 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19381 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19391 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19392 with the image size is printed.
19395 \begin_layout Standard
19396 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19397 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19399 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19402 \begin_layout Standard
19404 \begin_inset Graphics
19405 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19413 \begin_layout Standard
19414 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19415 the image into a float, see section
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19422 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19429 \begin_layout Subsection
19431 \begin_inset Index idx
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19443 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19451 You can insert images in any known file format.
19452 But as we explained in section
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19459 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19463 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19465 therefore uses the program
19469 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19470 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19471 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19478 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19485 \begin_layout Standard
19486 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19489 \begin_layout Description
19491 \begin_inset space ~
19494 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19495 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19496 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19500 Graphics Interchange Format
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19504 (GIF, file extension
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19552 Portable Network Graphics
19553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19556 (PNG, file extension
19557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19569 \begin_inset Index idx
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19604 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19608 (JPG, file extension
19609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19633 \begin_inset Index idx
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 \begin_layout Description
19669 \begin_inset space ~
19672 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19674 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19675 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19676 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19677 \begin_inset Newline newline
19680 Scalable image formats can be
19681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19684 Scalable Vector Graphics
19685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19688 (SVG, file extension
19689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19701 \begin_inset Index idx
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19736 Encapsulated PostScript
19737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19740 (EPS, file extension
19741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19753 \begin_inset Index idx
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19788 Portable Document Format
19789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19792 (PDF, file extension
19793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19805 \begin_inset Index idx
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19823 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19824 result will not be scalable.
19825 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19839 \begin_layout Standard
19840 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19847 \begin_layout Subsection
19848 Grouping of Image Settings
19849 \begin_inset Index idx
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 Images ! Settings grouping
19861 \begin_layout Standard
19862 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19864 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19865 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19867 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19868 need to manually change each of them.
19872 \begin_layout Standard
19873 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19876 \begin_inset space ~
19880 \begin_inset space ~
19892 \begin_inset space ~
19896 \begin_inset space ~
19902 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19903 and checking the name of the desired group.
19906 \begin_layout Section
19908 \begin_inset Index idx
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19927 \begin_layout Standard
19928 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19931 arg "tabular-insert"
19936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19940 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19941 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19942 from the rest of the table.
19943 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19944 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19946 Here is an example table:
19949 \begin_layout Standard
19951 \begin_inset Tabular
19952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19953 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 \begin_layout Subsection
20161 \begin_layout Standard
20162 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20165 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20169 This brings up the table dialog.
20170 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20171 cursor is placed currently.
20172 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20173 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20174 done on all of your selection.
20177 \begin_layout Standard
20178 In addition to the table dialog, the
20181 \begin_inset space ~
20186 helps you in setting table properties.
20187 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20190 \begin_layout Standard
20194 \begin_inset space ~
20199 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20200 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20201 current cell respectively.
20202 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20204 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20205 of text, see section
20206 \begin_inset space ~
20210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20212 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20219 \begin_layout Standard
20220 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20221 using the check box
20230 This will merge the cells to
20234 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20235 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20236 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20237 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20238 in the last row without the upper border:
20241 \begin_layout Standard
20243 \begin_inset Tabular
20244 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20245 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20247 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 \begin_layout Standard
20381 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20382 -arguments for the table.
20383 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20384 explained in the chapter
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20397 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20398 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20399 but are visible in the output.
20402 \begin_layout Standard
20403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 Most DVI-viewers are
20415 able to display rotations.
20423 \begin_layout Standard
20428 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20433 adds lines for all cell borders.
20436 \begin_layout Subsection
20438 \begin_inset Index idx
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 Tables ! Multi-page
20448 \begin_inset Index idx
20451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 \begin_layout Standard
20461 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20464 \begin_inset space ~
20468 \begin_inset space ~
20476 \begin_inset space ~
20481 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20482 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20485 \begin_layout Description
20490 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20491 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20492 Except for the first page, if
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_layout Description
20507 \begin_inset space ~
20512 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20513 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20516 \begin_layout Description
20521 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20522 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20523 except for the last page, if
20526 \begin_inset space ~
20534 \begin_layout Description
20538 \begin_inset space ~
20543 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20544 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20547 \begin_layout Description
20548 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20549 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20555 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20558 \begin_inset space ~
20566 \begin_layout Standard
20567 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20568 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20569 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20575 In this context, first means first in this order:
20578 \begin_inset space ~
20590 \begin_inset space ~
20595 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20598 \begin_layout Standard
20600 \begin_inset Tabular
20601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20602 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20603 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20604 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20605 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20606 <row endfirsthead="true">
20607 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20618 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <row endfirsthead="true">
20638 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <row endhead="true">
20671 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <row endhead="true">
20702 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <row endfoot="true">
20735 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <row endlastfoot="true">
22717 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 \begin_layout Subsection
22756 \begin_inset Index idx
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22768 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22775 \begin_layout Standard
22776 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22777 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22778 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22779 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22783 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22786 \begin_layout Standard
22787 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22788 for the column in the table dialog.
22789 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22790 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22794 \begin_layout Standard
22796 \begin_inset Tabular
22797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22798 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22800 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22890 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 This is longer now.
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23003 This is longer now.
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 \begin_layout Standard
23035 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23036 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23042 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23048 Selection with the mouse or with
23052 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23053 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23054 the selection from outside the table.
23057 \begin_layout Section
23059 \begin_inset Index idx
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23078 \begin_layout Subsection
23082 \begin_layout Standard
23083 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23084 have a fixed location.
23086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23093 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23101 \begin_inset space ~
23106 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23107 too many notes on the current page.
23110 \begin_layout Standard
23111 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23112 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23113 and pages without text.
23114 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23115 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23116 Floats are therefore numbered.
23117 Referencing is described in section
23118 \begin_inset space ~
23122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23124 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23131 \begin_layout Standard
23132 To insert a float, use the menu
23134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23138 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23139 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23141 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23142 \begin_inset Index idx
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23152 paragraph within the float.
23153 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23154 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23155 left-clicking on the box label.
23156 A closed float box looks like this:
23157 \begin_inset Graphics
23158 filename clipart/float.png
23163 – a gray button with a red label.
23166 \begin_layout Standard
23167 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23169 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23172 \begin_layout Subsection
23174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23176 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23181 \begin_inset Index idx
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 Floats ! Figure floats
23193 \begin_layout Standard
23195 \begin_inset space ~
23199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23201 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23205 was created using the menu
23207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23208 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23214 arg "float-insert figure"
23218 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23227 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23231 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23232 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23236 \begin_inset space ~
23244 arg "layout-paragraph"
23250 \begin_layout Standard
23251 \begin_inset Float figure
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 \begin_inset Graphics
23259 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23274 name "fig:A-star-in"
23291 \begin_layout Standard
23292 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23293 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23304 ) and refer to it using the menu
23306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23312 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23316 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23317 vague references like
23318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23325 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23326 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23336 For more about cross-references, see section
23337 \begin_inset space ~
23341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23343 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23350 \begin_layout Standard
23351 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23352 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23353 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23354 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23355 as described in section
23356 \begin_inset space ~
23360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23362 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23368 \begin_inset space ~
23372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23374 reference "fig:Two-images"
23378 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23379 You can also set the images one below the other.
23381 \begin_inset space ~
23385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23387 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23394 reference "fig:Star"
23398 are the subfigures.
23401 \begin_layout Standard
23402 \begin_inset Float figure
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23412 \begin_inset Float figure
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23423 name "fig:Undefinable"
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 \begin_inset Graphics
23437 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23453 \begin_inset Float figure
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23477 \begin_inset Graphics
23478 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23490 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23502 name "fig:Two-images"
23519 \begin_layout Subsection
23521 \begin_inset Index idx
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 Floats ! Table floats
23533 \begin_layout Standard
23534 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23537 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23540 or the toolbar button
23543 arg "float-insert table"
23547 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23548 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23549 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23551 \begin_inset space ~
23555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23557 reference "tab:Table-float"
23564 \begin_layout Standard
23565 \begin_inset Float table
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23576 name "tab:Table-float"
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 \begin_inset Tabular
23591 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23592 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23746 \end{array}\right]$
23754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23788 \begin_layout Subsection
23790 \begin_inset Index idx
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_layout Standard
23804 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23805 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23806 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23808 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23816 \begin_inset space ~
23824 \begin_layout Section
23826 \begin_inset Index idx
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 \begin_layout Standard
23840 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23842 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23843 \begin_inset space \space{}
23850 \begin_layout Standard
23851 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23852 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23858 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23859 and its alignment within the page.
23862 \begin_layout Standard
23864 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23874 height_special "totalheight"
23879 backgroundcolor "none"
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 This is a minipage.
23886 The text is set in an italic style.
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23893 another formatting.
23901 \begin_layout Standard
23902 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23905 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23909 as described in section
23910 \begin_inset space ~
23914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23916 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23921 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23927 \begin_layout Standard
23928 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23938 height_special "totalheight"
23943 backgroundcolor "none"
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23948 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23954 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23958 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23968 height_special "totalheight"
23973 backgroundcolor "none"
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23978 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23986 \begin_layout Standard
23987 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23993 \begin_layout Standard
23994 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23996 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24003 \begin_inset space ~
24011 \begin_layout Chapter
24012 Mathematical Formulas
24013 \begin_inset Index idx
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset Index idx
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24057 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24064 \begin_layout Standard
24065 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24070 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24073 \begin_layout Section
24075 \begin_inset Index idx
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 \begin_layout Standard
24088 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24101 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24103 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24104 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24105 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24113 \begin_layout Standard
24114 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24118 \begin_inset space ~
24123 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24126 \begin_layout Standard
24127 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24128 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24131 \begin_layout Standard
24132 This is a line with an inline formula
24133 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24140 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24141 paragraph, like this one:
24142 \begin_inset Formula
24149 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24152 \begin_layout Standard
24154 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24156 For example, typing
24157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24170 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24171 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24175 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24178 \begin_inset space ~
24186 \begin_layout Subsection
24187 Navigating in Formulas
24188 \begin_inset Index idx
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 \begin_layout Standard
24201 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24202 achieved with the arrow keys.
24204 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24205 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24210 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24211 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24215 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24219 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24222 \end{array}\right]$
24230 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24235 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24236 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24239 \begin_layout Standard
24244 , printed in this document as
24245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24249 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24256 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24257 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24258 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24263 For example, if you want
24264 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24272 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24291 , since in the latter case only the
24294 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24299 will be under the square root sign:
24300 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24306 \begin_layout Standard
24307 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24309 \begin_inset Formula
24311 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24320 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24321 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24324 \begin_layout Subsection
24328 \begin_layout Standard
24329 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24330 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24334 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24335 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24336 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24337 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24338 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24342 \begin_layout Subsection
24343 Exponents and Subscripts
24344 \begin_inset Index idx
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 \begin_inset Index idx
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 \begin_layout Standard
24367 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24370 arg "math-superscript"
24376 arg "math-subscript"
24379 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24381 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24384 , type in a formula
24387 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24397 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24403 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24407 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24413 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24419 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24428 , you have to use an extra
24432 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24433 For example, if you want
24434 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24440 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24446 Subscripts are similar: To get
24447 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24453 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24461 \begin_layout Subsection
24463 \begin_inset Index idx
24466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 \begin_layout Standard
24476 Create a fraction either with the command
24482 or by using the icon
24485 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24491 \begin_inset space ~
24497 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24498 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24499 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24504 To move back up, press
24509 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24510 \begin_inset Formula
24512 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24515 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24523 \begin_layout Subsection
24525 \begin_inset Index idx
24528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24537 \begin_layout Standard
24538 Roots can be created using the
24541 \begin_inset space ~
24549 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24555 arg "math-insert \\root"
24577 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24583 always produces a square root.
24586 \begin_layout Subsection
24587 Operators with Limits
24588 \begin_inset Index idx
24591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24598 \begin_inset Index idx
24601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24610 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24617 \begin_layout Standard
24619 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24623 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24626 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24627 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24628 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24629 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24630 The sum operator will automatically place its
24631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24638 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24640 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24644 \begin_inset Formula
24646 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24651 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24655 \begin_layout Standard
24656 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24658 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24659 behind the operator and using the menu
24661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24662 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24664 \begin_inset space ~
24668 \begin_inset space ~
24682 \begin_layout Standard
24683 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24692 \begin_inset Index idx
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24702 \begin_inset Formula
24704 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24709 which will place the
24710 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24722 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24723 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24729 \begin_layout Standard
24730 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24737 Have a look at section
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24744 reference "subsec:Functions"
24748 for an explanation of function macros.
24751 \begin_layout Subsection
24753 \begin_inset Index idx
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24765 \begin_layout Standard
24766 Most math symbols can be found in the
24769 \begin_inset space ~
24774 under one of several categories; including
24791 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24795 \begin_layout Standard
24796 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24797 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24798 don't have to use the
24801 \begin_inset space ~
24806 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24808 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24811 \begin_layout Subsection
24813 \begin_inset Index idx
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24825 \begin_layout Standard
24826 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24832 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24838 \begin_inset space ~
24846 arg "math-insert \\space"
24850 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24851 For example, the sequence
24856 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24859 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24861 \begin_inset Graphics
24862 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24867 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24868 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24869 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24870 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24871 , because they are negative
24873 Here are two examples:
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24886 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24892 \begin_layout Standard
24902 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24908 \begin_layout Subsection
24910 \begin_inset Index idx
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24922 name "subsec:Functions"
24929 \begin_layout Standard
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24938 contains under the button
24941 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24944 a number of function macros, such as
24945 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24949 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24957 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24964 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24965 avoid confusions, because
24966 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24970 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24979 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24983 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24989 \begin_layout Standard
24990 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24991 are placed, as described in section
24992 \begin_inset space ~
24996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24998 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25005 \begin_layout Subsection
25007 \begin_inset Index idx
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 \begin_layout Standard
25020 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25022 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25023 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25024 commands, for example, to enter
25025 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25028 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25029 Our example is entered by typing
25034 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25041 \begin_inset space ~
25045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25047 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25051 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25054 \begin_layout Standard
25055 \begin_inset Float table
25060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25066 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25070 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 \begin_inset Tabular
25081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25223 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25493 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25547 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25668 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25671 \begin_inset space ~
25679 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25682 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25686 \begin_layout Section
25687 Brackets and Delimiters
25688 \begin_inset Index idx
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25698 \begin_inset Index idx
25701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25710 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25717 \begin_layout Standard
25718 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25720 For some purposes, using just the keys
25725 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25726 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25727 toolbar delimiter icon
25730 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25734 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25735 \begin_inset Formula
25737 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25745 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25746 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25750 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25753 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25759 \begin_inset Formula
25761 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25769 \begin_layout Standard
25770 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25771 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25775 \begin_layout Standard
25776 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25777 left side and right side.
25778 If you use the option
25781 \begin_inset space ~
25786 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25787 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25789 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25794 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25795 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25799 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25800 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25801 is to go inside the brackets.
25802 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25807 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25808 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25809 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25813 arg "math-delim ( )"
25819 \begin_layout Section
25820 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25821 \begin_inset Index idx
25824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25831 \begin_inset Index idx
25834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25841 \begin_inset Index idx
25844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25845 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25858 \begin_inset space ~
25866 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25870 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25871 Here is an example:
25872 \begin_inset Formula
25874 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25883 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25884 \begin_inset space ~
25888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25890 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25895 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25896 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25897 This alignment is set in the box
25902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25951 for every column as default.
25952 For example, the sequence
25953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25964 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25965 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25966 corresponds to the relevant column.
25967 The result will look like this:
25968 \begin_inset Formula
25971 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25972 column & has & has\,right\\
25973 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25986 arg "newline-insert newline"
25989 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25990 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25992 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25995 or the math toolbar.
25998 \begin_layout Standard
25999 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26000 It can be created with the menu
26002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26003 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26005 \begin_inset space ~
26017 Here is an example:
26018 \begin_inset Formula
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26036 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26039 arg "newline-insert newline"
26043 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26048 arg "newline-insert newline"
26051 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26059 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26060 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26061 A new row is created by every further entry of
26064 arg "newline-insert newline"
26068 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26069 Here is an example:
26070 \begin_inset Formula
26072 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26073 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26078 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26079 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26080 \begin_inset Formula
26082 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26090 \begin_layout Standard
26091 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26098 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26099 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26102 reference "eq:asquared"
26107 The other types are described in section
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26114 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26121 \begin_layout Section
26122 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26123 \begin_inset Index idx
26126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 Math ! Formula numbering
26133 \begin_inset Index idx
26136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 Math ! Referencing formulas
26143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26145 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26153 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26155 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26156 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26158 \begin_inset space ~
26162 \begin_inset space ~
26170 arg "math-number-toggle"
26174 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26175 within parentheses.
26176 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26177 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26178 the document class.
26179 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26180 separated by a dot:
26181 \begin_inset Formula
26191 arg "math-number-toggle"
26194 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26195 You can only number displayed formulas.
26198 \begin_layout Standard
26199 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26201 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26202 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26216 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26219 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26220 \begin_inset Formula
26223 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26229 To number all lines use the shortcut
26232 arg "math-number-toggle"
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26242 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26243 A label is inserted with the menu
26245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26254 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26255 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26256 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26268 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26269 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26270 We inserted in the following example the label
26271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26278 in the second line:
26279 \begin_inset Formula
26281 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26282 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26287 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26288 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26289 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26301 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26305 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26306 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26307 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26308 as the formula number:
26311 \begin_layout Standard
26312 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26315 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26323 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26324 's cross-reference box are described in section
26325 \begin_inset space ~
26329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26331 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26336 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26344 \begin_layout Section
26345 User defined math macros
26346 \begin_inset Index idx
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26360 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26361 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26362 Math macros are explained in section
26365 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_layout Section
26381 \begin_layout Subsection
26383 \begin_inset Index idx
26386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26395 \begin_layout Standard
26396 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26397 To set a font in a formula, use the
26400 \begin_inset space ~
26408 arg "math-insert \\font"
26411 , or enter its command, listed in table
26412 \begin_inset space ~
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26418 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26425 \begin_layout Standard
26426 \begin_inset Float table
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26432 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26437 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26441 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 \begin_inset Tabular
26452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26453 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26455 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26541 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26574 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26601 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26628 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26724 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26732 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26748 \begin_layout Standard
26749 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26750 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26755 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26756 space when you need a space in the box.
26757 Here is an example where
26758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26769 denotes the set of numbers:
26770 \begin_inset Formula
26772 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26780 \begin_layout Standard
26781 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26782 You can, for example, put a character in
26791 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26795 \begin_inset Newline newline
26798 So it is better not to use this feature.
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26803 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26807 \begin_inset Newline newline
26810 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26816 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26817 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26823 \begin_layout Standard
26830 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26833 \begin_layout Standard
26834 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26836 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26839 \begin_inset space ~
26847 \begin_layout Subsection
26849 \begin_inset Index idx
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26862 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26864 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26868 \begin_inset space ~
26872 \begin_inset space ~
26880 \begin_inset space ~
26888 arg "math-insert \\font"
26892 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26893 in black instead of blue.
26894 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26895 Here is an example:
26896 \begin_inset Formula
26899 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26900 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26909 \begin_layout Subsection
26911 \begin_inset Index idx
26914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26923 \begin_layout Standard
26924 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26925 automatically chosen in most situations.
26943 For most characters,
26951 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26952 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26957 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26958 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26959 thinks are appropriate.
26960 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26963 arg "math-insert \\style"
26967 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26968 For example, you can set
26969 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26972 , which is normally in
26981 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26985 The four styles are used in the following example:
26988 \begin_layout Standard
26989 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26993 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26997 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27001 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27007 \begin_layout Standard
27008 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27009 is set in a particular size with the menu
27011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27013 \begin_inset space ~
27018 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27019 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27020 will be adjusted to correspond.
27021 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27032 \begin_layout Standard
27036 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27042 \begin_layout Section
27043 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27045 \begin_inset Index idx
27048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 \begin_inset Index idx
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 \begin_layout Standard
27069 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27070 that are in common use.
27073 \begin_layout Subsection
27074 Enabling AMS-Support
27077 \begin_layout Standard
27078 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27079 the document by selecting the checkbox
27082 \begin_inset space ~
27086 \begin_inset space ~
27090 \begin_inset space ~
27097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27101 \begin_inset Index idx
27104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27105 Document ! Settings
27113 \begin_inset space ~
27119 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27120 -errors in formulas,
27121 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27124 \begin_layout Subsection
27126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27128 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27133 \begin_inset Index idx
27136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27137 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27145 \begin_layout Standard
27146 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27147 provides a selection of different formula types.
27149 allows you to choose between
27170 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27178 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27181 \begin_layout Chapter
27185 \begin_layout Section
27187 \begin_inset Index idx
27190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27199 name "sec:Cross-References"
27206 \begin_layout Standard
27207 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27208 's strengths is cross-references.
27209 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27211 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27212 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27213 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27216 \begin_layout Enumerate
27220 \begin_layout Enumerate
27221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27223 name "enu:Second-item"
27230 \begin_layout Enumerate
27234 \begin_layout Standard
27235 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27240 or by pressing the toolbar button
27247 A gray label box like this:
27248 \begin_inset Graphics
27249 filename clipart/label.png
27253 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27255 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27290 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27291 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27307 \begin_layout Standard
27308 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27313 or the toolbar button
27316 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27320 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27321 \begin_inset Graphics
27322 filename clipart/reference.png
27326 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27328 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27341 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 As an alternative to
27348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27351 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27356 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27357 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27371 \begin_layout Standard
27372 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27373 \begin_inset space ~
27377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27379 reference "enu:Second-item"
27386 \begin_layout Standard
27387 It is recommended to use a protected space
27391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27392 described in section
27393 \begin_inset space ~
27397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27399 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27408 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27409 line breaks between them.
27412 \begin_layout Standard
27413 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27416 \begin_layout Description
27417 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27420 reference "fig:Two-images"
27427 \begin_layout Description
27428 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27429 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27441 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27448 \begin_layout Description
27449 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27450 \begin_inset space ~
27454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27455 LatexCommand pageref
27456 reference "fig:Two-images"
27463 \begin_layout Description
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27469 \begin_inset space ~
27472 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27474 LatexCommand vpageref
27475 reference "fig:Two-images"
27480 \begin_inset Newline newline
27483 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27484 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27485 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27486 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27487 it prints “on the next page”.
27488 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27491 \begin_layout Description
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset space ~
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27504 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27507 reference "fig:Two-images"
27512 \begin_inset Newline newline
27515 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27521 ; otherwise it behaves like
27525 \begin_inset space ~
27529 \begin_inset space ~
27538 \begin_layout Description
27540 \begin_inset space ~
27543 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27544 \begin_inset Newline newline
27548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27556 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27566 \begin_inset Index idx
27569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 packages ! prettyref
27577 \begin_inset Index idx
27580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27582 packages ! refstyle
27593 \begin_inset Newline newline
27596 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27597 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27600 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27605 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27613 is the default and preferred because
27617 supports only English documents.
27618 The format is specified by using the command
27630 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27631 preamble of the document.
27632 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27650 \begin_inset Newline newline
27657 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27662 \begin_inset Newline newline
27673 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27674 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27676 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27677 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27682 , you might do so as follows:
27683 \begin_inset Newline newline
27690 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27695 \begin_inset Newline newline
27698 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27699 the package documentation
27700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27702 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27708 \begin_inset Newline newline
27719 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27726 \begin_layout Description
27728 \begin_inset space ~
27731 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27733 LatexCommand nameref
27734 reference "fig:Two-images"
27741 \begin_layout Description
27743 \begin_inset space ~
27746 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27747 label for the reference:
27748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27749 LatexCommand labelonly
27750 reference "fig:Two-images"
27755 \begin_inset Newline newline
27758 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27759 Code, if you want to issue a command
27760 that \SpecialChar LyX
27766 , then you may want to use the
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27774 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27784 This is the form needed for e.
27785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27789 \begin_inset space \space{}
27796 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27797 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27799 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27803 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27807 \begin_layout Standard
27808 You can only use the style
27812 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27816 is always possible.
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27821 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27823 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27824 \begin_inset space ~
27828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27830 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27838 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27842 \begin_inset space ~
27846 \begin_inset space ~
27851 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27852 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27855 \begin_inset space ~
27860 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27861 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27864 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27870 \begin_layout Standard
27871 You can change labels at any time.
27872 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27873 do not need to think about this.
27876 \begin_layout Standard
27877 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27879 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27883 \begin_layout Standard
27884 References are described in detail in the section
27885 \begin_inset space ~
27895 \begin_inset space ~
27903 \begin_layout Section
27904 Table of Contents and other Listings
27905 \begin_inset Index idx
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 \begin_inset Index idx
27918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27919 Navigating ! Outline
27925 \begin_inset Index idx
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27944 \begin_layout Subsection
27946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27948 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27955 \begin_layout Standard
27956 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27959 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27961 \begin_inset space ~
27965 \begin_inset space ~
27971 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27973 If you click on it, the
27977 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27978 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27979 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27981 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27983 \begin_inset space ~
27988 that is described in section
27989 \begin_inset space ~
27993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27995 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28002 \begin_layout Standard
28003 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28004 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28006 \begin_inset space ~
28010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28012 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28016 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28018 \begin_inset space ~
28022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28024 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28028 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28030 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28033 \begin_layout Subsection
28034 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28037 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28045 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28047 You can insert them via the
28049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28053 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28056 \begin_layout Section
28057 URLs and Hyperlinks
28058 \begin_inset Index idx
28061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28068 \begin_inset Index idx
28071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28080 \begin_layout Subsection
28082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28092 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28100 \begin_layout Standard
28101 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28103 \begin_inset Flex URL
28106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28117 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28123 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28127 \begin_layout Standard
28128 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28145 \begin_layout Subsection
28147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28149 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28156 \begin_layout Standard
28157 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28162 or with the toolbar button
28169 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28178 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28179 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28182 name "LyX's homepage"
28183 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28188 , an Email address like this:
28189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28191 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28192 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28198 , or a link to a file.
28203 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28211 \begin_layout Standard
28212 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28225 to the link target.
28228 \begin_layout Standard
28229 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28230 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28231 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28232 the text style dialog.
28233 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28239 name "LyX's homepage"
28240 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28248 \begin_layout Standard
28249 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28253 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28255 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28256 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28260 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28262 \begin_inset Newline newline
28270 \begin_inset Newline newline
28277 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28280 \begin_layout Section
28282 \begin_inset Index idx
28285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28294 name "sec:Appendices"
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 Appendices are created with the menu
28304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28306 \begin_inset space ~
28310 \begin_inset space ~
28316 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28317 as the appendix part of the book.
28318 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28323 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28324 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28325 and the subsection number.
28326 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28330 \begin_layout Standard
28332 \begin_inset space ~
28336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28338 reference "chap:Credits"
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28349 reference "subsec:Export"
28356 \begin_layout Section
28358 \begin_inset Index idx
28361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28370 name "sec:Bibliography"
28377 \begin_layout Standard
28378 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28380 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28381 \begin_inset space ~
28385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28387 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28394 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28399 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28406 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28411 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28412 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28413 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28417 using a bibliography database.
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28422 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28426 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28427 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28428 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28429 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28430 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28433 \begin_layout Subsection
28434 The Bibliography Environment
28435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28437 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28444 \begin_layout Standard
28449 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28451 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28460 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28462 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28463 of ASCII characters only.
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28472 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28478 \begin_inset Newline newline
28482 \begin_inset Flex URL
28485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28499 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28509 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28510 \begin_inset Newline newline
28517 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28518 the number of the entry.
28523 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28532 \begin_layout Standard
28533 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28538 or the toolbar button
28541 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28545 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28546 containing the available citations.
28547 Select one or more keys from the list and
28557 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28558 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28564 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28565 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28577 \begin_layout Standard
28581 Companion Second Edition
28584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28586 key "latexcompanion"
28594 \begin_layout Standard
28595 The \SpecialChar LyX
28596 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28608 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28615 \begin_inset Index idx
28618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 Author A and Author B(Year)
28639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28646 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28648 Then, if you select
28651 \begin_inset space ~
28656 in the document settings
28657 \begin_inset Index idx
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28661 Document ! Settings
28668 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28670 \begin_inset space ~
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28678 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28685 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28688 \begin_layout Standard
28689 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28694 \begin_inset space ~
28702 arg "layout-paragraph"
28706 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28709 \begin_layout Subsection
28710 Bibliography databases
28711 \begin_inset Index idx
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28715 Bibliography ! Databases
28721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28723 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28730 \begin_layout Standard
28731 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28737 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28739 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28740 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28745 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28747 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28748 your working field in a database.
28749 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28750 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28751 list for that document.
28752 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28756 \begin_layout Standard
28757 The database is a text file with the file extension
28758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28769 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28770 The format is explained in
28771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28778 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28782 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28788 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28789 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28790 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28792 \begin_inset Flex URL
28795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28807 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28808 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28809 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28811 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28813 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28814 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28815 Those are addressed by
28820 \begin_inset Index idx
28823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28825 packages ! biblatex
28831 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28832 (although it has been significantly
28833 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28843 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28844 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28845 might conversely fail to correctly
28846 handle databases that use specific
28855 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28859 \begin_layout Standard
28860 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28865 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28871 \begin_inset Index idx
28874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28875 Document ! Settings
28887 \begin_inset space ~
28892 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28901 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28903 \begin_inset Index idx
28906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28916 \begin_layout Standard
28917 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28925 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28927 \begin_inset space ~
28933 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28934 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28942 Add bibliography to TOC
28944 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28949 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28950 in the document or just the cited references.
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28955 style file is a text file with the file extension
28956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28967 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28968 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28969 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28970 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28972 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28978 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28979 \begin_inset Newline newline
28983 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28985 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28995 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29000 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29010 \begin_inset Index idx
29013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29014 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29020 \begin_inset Index idx
29023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29025 packages ! biblatex
29033 \begin_layout Standard
29034 Accessing a database via
29038 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29046 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29048 \begin_inset space ~
29054 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29055 you cannot select a
29060 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29069 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29082 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29083 file (text file with the file extension
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29095 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29096 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29098 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29102 \begin_layout Standard
29107 styles are not set in the
29110 \begin_inset space ~
29115 dialog, but in the document settings.
29116 \begin_inset Index idx
29119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29120 Document ! Settings
29125 However, in the dialog in the
29129 field, which is only visible if you use
29133 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29134 example how its heading will appear).
29135 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29152 \begin_inset space ~
29156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29158 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29168 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29169 Bibliography Processors
29172 \begin_layout Standard
29173 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29174 uses a bibliography processor,
29175 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29176 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29177 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29179 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29180 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29183 \begin_layout Standard
29184 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29186 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29187 You can do this on a general level in
29189 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29190 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29191 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29194 or for individual documents in
29196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29197 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29201 The following variants are available by default:
29204 \begin_layout Description
29205 biber a specific, modern processor
29206 \begin_inset Index idx
29209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 developed exclusively for
29220 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29226 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29231 makes use of; if you use the
29235 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29242 \begin_layout Description
29243 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29244 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29245 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29249 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29252 \begin_layout Description
29253 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29254 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29258 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29262 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29266 features are supported.
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29270 By default (with the
29276 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29277 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29291 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29292 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29295 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29296 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29309 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29310 -based bibliography styles).
29311 This should suit most needs.
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29315 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29316 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29317 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29322 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29323 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29324 You can adjust it in
29326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29327 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29328 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29334 \begin_layout Standard
29335 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29336 can add below the selection.
29337 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29338 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29354 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29358 \begin_layout Standard
29360 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29362 These are explained in detail in section
29364 Customizing Bibliographies
29368 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29373 Additional Features
29378 \begin_layout Subsection
29380 \begin_inset Index idx
29383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29384 Bibliography ! Citation format
29390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29392 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29399 \begin_layout Standard
29400 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29405 \begin_inset space \space{}
29408 numerical citation (as
29409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29416 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29424 ) or author-year citations (as
29425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29434 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29439 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29447 \begin_inset Index idx
29450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29451 Document ! Settings
29456 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29462 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29463 labels, is there to use
29466 \begin_inset space ~
29477 \begin_inset space ~
29482 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29485 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29493 With a bibliography database (see
29494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29496 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29503 ) one has in contrary to the
29507 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29508 These style formats are available:
29511 \begin_layout Description
29513 \begin_inset space ~
29516 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29517 -based approached without any additional packages
29518 (simple numeric citations).
29521 \begin_layout Description
29522 Biblatex loads the package
29527 \begin_inset Index idx
29530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29532 packages ! biblatex
29537 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29539 Biblatex citation style
29543 Biblatex bibliography style
29546 Options to the package
29550 can be entered in the
29557 \begin_layout Description
29559 \begin_inset space ~
29563 \begin_inset space ~
29566 mode) loads the package
29570 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29571 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29583 behavior very closely.
29588 this option has some additional styles.
29593 styles are also supported by this variant.
29596 \begin_layout Description
29598 \begin_inset space ~
29601 (BibTeX) loads the package
29606 \begin_inset Index idx
29609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29616 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29619 \begin_layout Description
29621 \begin_inset space ~
29624 (BibTeX) loads the package
29629 \begin_inset Index idx
29632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29639 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29642 \begin_layout Standard
29651 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29653 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29662 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29664 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29665 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29667 Biblatex citation style
29670 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29676 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29681 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29682 are available in the
29687 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29688 a name prefix such as
29689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29704 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29709 \begin_inset space \space{}
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29725 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29731 \begin_inset space \space{}
29734 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29740 \begin_inset space \space{}
29744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29756 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29760 \begin_inset space ~
29768 \begin_inset space ~
29774 Here is a simple example where the text
29775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29779 \begin_inset space ~
29783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29786 appears after the reference:
29789 \begin_layout Quote
29791 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29794 key "latexcompanion"
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29803 All styles except for
29807 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29817 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29821 \begin_layout Standard
29822 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29823 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29824 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29829 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29830 multi-citation (so-called
29831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29834 qualified citation lists
29835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29846 dialog will display three columns in the field
29853 \begin_inset space ~
29861 \begin_inset space ~
29869 \begin_inset space ~
29875 If you double-click on an item's
29878 \begin_inset space ~
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29891 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29894 General text before
29900 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29903 \begin_layout Section
29905 \begin_inset Index idx
29908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29924 \begin_layout Standard
29925 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29934 or the toolbar button
29941 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29942 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29943 by \SpecialChar LyX
29944 as the index entry.
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29948 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29951 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29953 \begin_inset space ~
29959 A light blue box labeled
29960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29971 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29972 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29976 \begin_layout Standard
29977 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29978 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29979 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29980 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29984 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29992 \begin_layout Subsection
29993 Grouping Index Entries
29994 \begin_inset Index idx
29997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30006 \begin_layout Standard
30007 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30009 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30010 lists under the entry
30011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 First we create the entry
30020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30028 \begin_inset space ~
30032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30034 reference "subsec:Lists"
30039 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30040 \begin_inset space ~
30044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30046 reference "sec:Itemize"
30050 , we insert the command
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 for the enumerated list in section
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30077 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30084 \begin_layout Standard
30085 The exclamation mark
30086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30093 marks the grouping levels.
30094 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30095 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30096 If we don't have an index entry for
30097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30104 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30107 \begin_layout Subsection
30109 \begin_inset Index idx
30112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30113 Index ! Page ranges
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30122 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30124 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30125 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30126 an index entry in section
30127 \begin_inset space ~
30131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30133 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30143 Paragraph environments|(
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30147 and another entry at the end of section
30148 \begin_inset space ~
30152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30154 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30161 \begin_layout Standard
30164 Paragraph environments|)
30167 \begin_layout Standard
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30192 respectively start and end the index range.
30193 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30194 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30195 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30196 An example is the index entry
30197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30200 Document ! Settings
30201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30207 \begin_layout Subsection
30209 \begin_inset Index idx
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30213 Index ! Cross referencing
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30223 We referred for example in the index entry
30224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30238 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30242 ) to the index entry
30243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30250 in the same section using the entry
30253 \begin_layout Standard
30256 GIF|see{Image formats}
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30260 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30262 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30263 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30266 \begin_layout Subsection
30268 \begin_inset Index idx
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 Index ! Entry order
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30281 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30282 follow the rules for the index order.
30283 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30291 \begin_inset space ~
30295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30297 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30306 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30307 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30332 \begin_inset Index idx
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30336 Dummy entries ! maïs
30342 \begin_inset Index idx
30345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30346 Dummy entries ! maître
30352 \begin_inset Index idx
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30361 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30362 maïs, maison, maître.
30363 To achieve this, we use the command
30366 \begin_layout Standard
30369 previous entry@current entry
30372 \begin_layout Standard
30373 In our case we want to have
30374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30389 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30392 \begin_layout Standard
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30399 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30400 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 See the next subsection for an example.
30405 \begin_layout Subsection
30407 \begin_inset Index idx
30410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 Index ! Entry layout
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30420 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30421 \begin_inset Index idx
30424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30427 This is an italic dummy entry
30432 You can also format the page number using the character
30433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30440 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30441 -command without a backslash.
30442 We can write for example
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30448 italic page number:|textit
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 to get the page number in italic.
30453 \begin_inset Index idx
30456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30457 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30462 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30463 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30481 \begin_inset space ~
30487 Have a look at section
30488 \begin_inset space ~
30492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30494 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30498 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30511 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30515 to generate the index, see section
30516 \begin_inset space ~
30520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30522 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30531 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30536 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30540 key "latexcompanion"
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30554 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30556 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30557 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30558 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30559 If so, put the following in the preamble
30562 \begin_layout Standard
30574 \begin_layout Standard
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30584 \begin_layout Standard
30585 in the index entry.
30586 \begin_inset Index idx
30589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30595 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30596 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30597 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30600 \begin_layout Standard
30601 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30602 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30603 a bold font for all index entries.
30604 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30616 documentation for details,
30617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30619 key "makeindex,xindy"
30627 \begin_layout Subsection
30629 \begin_inset Index idx
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30641 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 If the index generation program
30653 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30654 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30658 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30659 distribution, is used.
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30668 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30669 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30670 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30671 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30672 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30682 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30684 dialog, see section
30685 \begin_inset space ~
30689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30691 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30696 The available options are listed and explained in
30697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30699 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30705 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30709 \begin_layout Standard
30710 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30711 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30715 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30719 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30720 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30723 \begin_layout Subsection
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30728 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30729 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30737 next to the standard index.
30739 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30740 that add this feature.
30747 \begin_inset Index idx
30750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30752 packages ! splitidx
30757 package to generate multiple indexes.
30758 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30764 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30766 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30774 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30775 style, but it also includes
30776 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30777 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30785 \begin_layout Standard
30786 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30787 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30793 and select the option
30795 Use multiple Indexes
30802 already contains the standard index
30803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30811 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30812 also appear as a heading) to the
30816 input field and press the
30821 The new index now also appears in the list.
30822 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30823 label color to the new index.
30826 \begin_layout Standard
30827 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30837 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30838 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30839 are additional features:
30842 \begin_layout Itemize
30843 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30844 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30847 \begin_layout Itemize
30848 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30849 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30854 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30855 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30856 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30857 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30860 \begin_layout Itemize
30865 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30866 code in the name of the index.
30869 \begin_layout Section
30870 Nomenclature/Glossary
30871 \begin_inset Index idx
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30881 \begin_inset Index idx
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30915 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30922 \begin_layout Standard
30923 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30924 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30925 called nomenclature or glossary.
30928 \begin_layout Standard
30929 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30936 \begin_inset Index idx
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30947 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30949 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30956 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30962 and then use the menu
30964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30970 \begin_inset space ~
30975 or the toolbar button
30978 arg "nomencl-insert"
30983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30994 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30999 The first is the term or
31003 that you wish to define.
31008 of the term or symbol.
31011 \begin_layout Standard
31012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31020 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31021 code for nomenclature entries the option
31025 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31033 \begin_layout Subsection
31034 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31035 \begin_inset Index idx
31038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31039 Nomenclature ! Layout
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31048 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31052 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31059 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31067 \begin_inset Newline newline
31075 \begin_inset Newline newline
31081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31088 character starts/ends the formula.
31089 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31090 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31102 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31112 \begin_layout Standard
31113 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31114 syntax is given in section
31115 \begin_inset space ~
31119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31121 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31128 \begin_layout Standard
31132 \begin_inset space ~
31137 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31139 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31144 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31151 in this document is:
31152 \begin_inset Newline newline
31157 dummy entry for the character
31162 \begin_inset Newline newline
31174 \begin_inset space ~
31184 font use the command
31213 \begin_layout Standard
31214 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31219 \begin_inset space \space{}
31223 \begin_inset Newline newline
31239 \begin_inset Newline newline
31242 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31243 This command will make the font of all symbols
31250 \begin_inset space ~
31258 \begin_layout Standard
31259 If the characters |
31260 \begin_inset space \space{}
31264 \begin_inset space \space{}
31268 \begin_inset space \space{}
31272 \begin_inset space \space{}
31276 \begin_inset space \space{}
31279 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31280 code they need to be escaped
31281 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31283 LatexCommand nomenclature
31284 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31285 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31293 \begin_layout Subsection
31294 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31295 \begin_inset Index idx
31298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31308 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31309 -code of the symbol
31311 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31313 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31316 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31317 LatexCommand nomenclature
31319 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31327 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31331 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31332 LatexCommand nomenclature
31335 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31341 They will be sorted by
31342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31368 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31371 will be sorted before the
31375 since the character
31376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31383 is considered in sorting.
31386 \begin_layout Standard
31387 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31390 \begin_inset space ~
31395 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31396 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31398 For the example given, you can insert
31402 in this field for the
31403 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31410 will be located before
31411 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31417 \begin_layout Standard
31418 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31433 \begin_layout Subsection
31434 Nomenclature Options
31435 \begin_inset Index idx
31438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31439 Nomenclature ! Options
31445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31447 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31454 \begin_layout Standard
31459 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31460 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31463 \begin_layout Description
31464 refeq Appends the phrase
31465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31480 to every nomenclature entry, where
31486 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31489 \begin_layout Description
31490 refpage Appends the phrase
31491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31506 to every nomenclature entry, where
31512 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31515 \begin_layout Description
31516 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31519 \begin_layout Standard
31520 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31521 class options list in the
31523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31527 In this document the options
31534 \begin_layout Standard
31535 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31541 \begin_layout Standard
31542 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31543 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31548 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31551 \begin_layout Description
31561 \begin_layout Description
31564 nomrefpage Like the
31571 \begin_layout Description
31574 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31583 \begin_layout Description
31587 \begin_inset space ~
31593 \begin_inset space ~
31598 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31610 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31611 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31615 \begin_layout Standard
31624 \begin_inset Newline newline
31630 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31634 \begin_inset space ~
31646 unskip, see equation
31649 \begin_inset Newline newline
31656 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31657 \begin_inset Newline newline
31663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31667 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_layout Standard
31685 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31693 in the document settings under
31696 \begin_inset space ~
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31712 \begin_inset Newline newline
31716 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31732 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31734 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31735 \begin_inset Newline newline
31742 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31743 \begin_inset Newline newline
31747 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31751 \begin_inset space ~
31763 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31768 \begin_layout Subsection
31769 Printing the Nomenclature
31770 \begin_inset Index idx
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31774 Nomenclature ! Printing
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31786 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31802 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31803 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31804 You can choose between these settings:
31807 \begin_layout Description
31808 Default a space of 1
31809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31815 \begin_layout Description
31817 \begin_inset space ~
31821 \begin_inset space ~
31824 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31827 \begin_layout Description
31828 Custom custom space
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31832 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31841 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31849 For example, in order to change the name to
31853 , add the following line to the preamble:
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31864 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31867 \begin_layout Subsection
31868 Nomenclature Program
31869 \begin_inset Index idx
31872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31873 Nomenclature ! Program
31879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31881 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31894 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31895 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31897 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31902 by adding options, see section
31903 \begin_inset space ~
31907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31909 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31914 The available options are listed and explained in
31915 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31917 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31925 \begin_layout Section
31927 \begin_inset Index idx
31930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31937 \begin_inset Index idx
31940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31941 Document ! Branches
31947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31949 name "sec:Branches"
31956 \begin_layout Standard
31957 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31958 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31959 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31960 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31963 \begin_layout Standard
31964 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31965 allows you to put text into branches.
31966 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31967 To create a branch, either select the menu
31969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31970 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31982 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31983 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31984 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31985 and whether the name of the branch should
31986 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31987 (see below for an example).
31988 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31989 to the name of the other) and to add
31990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32002 \begin_inset space ~
32005 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32006 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32009 \begin_layout Standard
32010 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32011 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32016 where you can choose a branch.
32017 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32022 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32023 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 \begin_inset Branch Question
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32036 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32044 \begin_layout Standard
32045 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32049 \begin_layout Standard
32054 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32070 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32073 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32074 Consider for example a file
32075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32082 which has the above branches.
32084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32091 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32115 branch were inactive,
32116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32131 branch was active, likewise
32132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32147 branch was active, and
32148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32151 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32155 if both branches were active.
32156 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32157 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32164 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32170 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32171 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32175 \begin_inset space ~
32183 \begin_layout Standard
32184 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32188 \begin_layout Standard
32194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32201 branch is deactivated.
32207 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32214 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32215 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32216 definitions for each branch.
32217 For example you can define for the question branch
32221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32222 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32223 -syntax, see section
32224 \begin_inset space ~
32228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32230 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32262 \begin_layout Standard
32263 and for the answer branch
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 \begin_inset Branch Question
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32323 \begin_layout Standard
32324 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32328 \begin_layout Standard
32332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32360 \begin_layout Standard
32361 Now it is possible to use the
32365 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32372 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32375 commands to obtain conditional output.
32376 Here is an example formula where only the
32383 \begin_inset Formula
32385 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32402 \begin_layout Standard
32403 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32409 \begin_inset space \space{}
32412 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32414 For this advanced usage, see the
32420 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32425 \begin_layout Section
32427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32429 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32434 \begin_inset Index idx
32437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32453 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32455 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32461 \begin_inset Index idx
32464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32466 packages ! hyperref
32471 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32472 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32473 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32474 part of the document.
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32479 The header information in the dialog tab
32483 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32484 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32485 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32486 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32490 \begin_inset space ~
32494 \begin_inset space ~
32499 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32500 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32501 and author entries.
32505 \begin_inset space ~
32509 \begin_inset space ~
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32518 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32522 You can specify in the dialog tab
32526 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32531 \begin_inset space ~
32535 \begin_inset space ~
32539 \begin_inset space ~
32544 option allows long links to be split;
32547 \begin_inset space ~
32551 \begin_inset space ~
32555 \begin_inset space ~
32563 \begin_inset space ~
32568 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32571 \begin_inset space ~
32576 colors the different links.
32577 The default colors are:
32580 \begin_layout Labeling
32581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32586 for hyperlinks and URLs
32589 \begin_layout Labeling
32590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32598 \begin_layout Labeling
32599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32607 \begin_layout Standard
32608 but you can change these in the field
32613 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32616 \begin_layout Standard
32619 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32627 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32628 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32629 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32637 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32638 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32639 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32649 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32650 when opening the PDF.
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32655 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32656 \begin_inset space ~
32659 1 will only display the sections.
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32664 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32670 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32671 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32681 \begin_layout Section
32683 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32687 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32694 \begin_layout Subsection
32697 \begin_inset Index idx
32700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32710 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32717 \begin_layout Standard
32718 As \SpecialChar LyX
32719 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32720 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32721 commands and constructs,
32724 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32725 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32726 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32727 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32728 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32729 cannot support all packages and
32733 \begin_layout Standard
32734 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32735 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32736 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32740 Code box is created by the menu
32742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32749 or by the toolbar button
32762 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32770 \begin_layout Standard
32771 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32773 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32775 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32780 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32785 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32792 , you can write the command part
32798 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32799 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32803 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32804 Code box behind the word.
32805 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32806 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32811 \begin_inset Graphics
32812 filename clipart/ERT.png
32820 \begin_layout Standard
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32825 This is a line with a
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32852 \begin_layout Standard
32853 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32861 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32862 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32863 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32864 know that the command is finished.
32872 \begin_layout Subsection
32873 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32875 \begin_inset Argument 1
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32879 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32886 \begin_inset Index idx
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32899 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32906 \begin_layout Standard
32907 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32908 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32909 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32910 uses in the background.
32911 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32912 is based on commands, you can
32913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32921 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32922 any time if you know the right commands.
32923 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32924 is the end of the day.
32925 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32926 all caption labels bold.
32927 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32929 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32933 \begin_layout Standard
32934 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32936 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32938 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 As result you find that the package
32957 \begin_inset Index idx
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32968 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32973 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32977 \begin_inset space ~
32985 \begin_layout Standard
32990 usepackage[options]{package name}
32993 \begin_layout Standard
32994 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32995 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32996 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32997 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33001 In your case the package name is
33006 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33011 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33012 So you add the command
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33020 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33029 For more commands provided by the
33033 package, have a look at its documentation,
33034 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33049 \begin_layout Standard
33050 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33052 For example if you use a
33056 class, you don't need the package
33060 , you can instead write
33063 \begin_layout Standard
33068 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33074 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33075 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33076 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33083 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33086 \begin_layout Standard
33087 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33088 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33090 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33091 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33092 Code box as described in the previous
33096 \begin_layout Standard
33097 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33098 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33103 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33111 \begin_layout Standard
33112 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33118 \begin_layout Standard
33122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33132 \begin_inset Note Note
33135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33136 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33144 \begin_layout Left Header
33145 \begin_inset Argument 1
33148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33168 \begin_inset Note Note
33171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33172 defines the header line as described below
33180 \begin_layout Center Header
33181 \begin_inset Argument 1
33184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 \begin_layout Right Header
33194 \begin_inset Argument 1
33197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33218 \begin_layout Left Footer
33219 \begin_inset Argument 1
33222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33243 \begin_layout Center Footer
33244 \begin_inset Argument 1
33247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 \begin_inset Newline newline
33263 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33269 \begin_layout Right Footer
33270 \begin_inset Argument 1
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33295 \begin_layout Section
33296 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33299 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33304 \begin_inset Index idx
33307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33308 Document ! Header/Footer line
33314 \begin_inset Index idx
33317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 \begin_layout Standard
33327 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33331 \begin_inset space ~
33342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33348 \begin_inset space ~
33354 As a second step add in the menu
33356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33366 Custom Header/Footerlines
33369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33373 This module offers the following 6
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33380 \begin_layout Description
33382 \begin_inset space ~
33386 \begin_inset space ~
33390 \begin_inset space ~
33394 \begin_inset space ~
33398 \begin_inset space ~
33404 \begin_layout Description
33406 \begin_inset space ~
33410 \begin_inset space ~
33414 \begin_inset space ~
33418 \begin_inset space ~
33422 \begin_inset space ~
33428 \begin_layout Standard
33429 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33430 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33433 \begin_layout Standard
33434 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33435 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33437 \begin_inset space ~
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33443 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33447 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 \begin_inset Float figure
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33460 \begin_inset Tabular
33461 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33462 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33463 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33464 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33465 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33529 The normal text on the page goes here.
33530 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33532 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33533 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33547 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33605 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33628 name "fig:Page-layout"
33632 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33645 \begin_layout Standard
33646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33654 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33658 \begin_inset space ~
33663 is set to “Default”.
33664 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33673 \begin_layout Subsection
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33678 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33679 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33680 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33681 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33683 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33685 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33690 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33704 \begin_layout Description
33707 thepage prints the current page number
33710 \begin_layout Description
33713 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33716 \begin_layout Description
33719 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33722 \begin_layout Description
33725 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33726 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33733 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33736 because it usually goes in a left header.
33739 \begin_layout Description
33742 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33743 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33745 It is normally used in the right header.
33748 \begin_layout Subsection
33749 Default header/footer
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33753 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33754 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33755 footer has the page number.
33756 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33757 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33758 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33761 \begin_inset space ~
33769 \begin_layout Subsection
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33775 Some pages are different.
33776 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33777 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33778 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33779 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33780 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33784 Header and footer decoration line
33787 \begin_layout Standard
33788 By default, you get a 0.4
33789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33792 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33793 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33805 in the following way:
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33815 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33818 \begin_layout Standard
33819 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33832 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33839 \begin_layout Standard
33840 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33842 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33843 \begin_inset space ~
33847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33857 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33858 Several header/footer lines
33861 \begin_layout Standard
33862 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33863 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33864 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33866 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33884 \begin_inset space ~
33892 \begin_layout Standard
33899 headheight}{height}
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33907 is a size in standard units (e.
33908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33912 \begin_inset space \space{}
33920 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33921 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33922 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33923 logfile with the menu
33925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33927 \begin_inset space ~
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33940 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33945 \begin_inset Index idx
33948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 packages ! fancyhdr
33956 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33957 for your header/footer.
33960 \begin_layout Subsection
33964 \begin_layout Standard
33965 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33966 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33967 This example consists of the following definition:
33970 \begin_layout Description
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33981 , empty optional argument
33984 \begin_layout Description
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33989 Header empty, empty optional argument
33992 \begin_layout Description
33994 \begin_inset space ~
34003 in the optional argument
34006 \begin_layout Description
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34017 in the optional argument
34020 \begin_layout Description
34022 \begin_inset space ~
34035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34039 \begin_inset Newline newline
34043 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34050 in the optional argument
34053 \begin_layout Description
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34064 , empty optional argument
34067 \begin_layout Description
34070 headrulewidth set to 2
34071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34078 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34079 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34085 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34096 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34102 \begin_layout Standard
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34110 pagestyle{headings}
34116 \begin_inset Note Note
34119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34120 switches back to page style with the default headings
34128 \begin_layout Section
34129 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34132 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34137 \begin_inset Index idx
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34147 \begin_inset Index idx
34150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34161 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34162 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34163 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34166 \begin_layout Subsection
34170 \begin_layout Standard
34171 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34177 \begin_inset Index idx
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 packages ! preview-latex
34187 (on some systems named simply
34192 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34201 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34203 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34211 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34212 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34213 -package are automatically
34214 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34218 \begin_layout Subsection
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34223 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34224 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34226 activate the option
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34249 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34269 \begin_inset space ~
34274 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34277 \begin_layout Standard
34278 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34300 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34301 and when you finish
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34314 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34315 generated by activating the option
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34324 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34332 \begin_layout Subsection
34333 Selected document parts
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34338 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34339 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34340 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34342 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34348 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34349 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34350 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34361 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 is explained in section
34375 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34380 \begin_inset space ~
34390 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34391 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34392 the final rotated boxes,
34393 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34394 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34396 Here is the result:
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 \begin_inset Preview
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34411 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34417 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34427 height_special "totalheight"
34432 backgroundcolor "none"
34435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34466 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 Previewing works also for colors.
34490 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34509 is explained in section
34516 \begin_inset space ~
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34530 \begin_inset Preview
34532 \begin_layout Standard
34536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34555 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34560 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34579 \begin_layout Standard
34580 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 If \SpecialChar LyX
34588 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34589 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34590 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34591 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34592 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34593 the \SpecialChar TeX
34595 If \SpecialChar LyX
34596 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34597 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34599 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34600 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34601 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34604 \begin_layout Subsection
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34611 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34614 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34621 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34623 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34625 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34626 's main window, then only this selection
34627 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34628 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34629 the source view window.
34634 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34635 ; but note that if you have
34636 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34638 not just the one which is open at the time.
34641 \begin_layout Section
34642 Advanced Find and Replace
34643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34645 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34650 \begin_inset Index idx
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34660 \begin_inset Index idx
34663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34672 \begin_layout Subsection
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34677 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34678 allows for searching of complex,
34679 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34681 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34682 The key-features are:
34685 \begin_layout Itemize
34686 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34687 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34688 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34692 \begin_layout Itemize
34693 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34694 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34695 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34696 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34699 \begin_layout Itemize
34700 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34701 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34702 outside of mathematics environments
34705 \begin_layout Itemize
34706 Search may be widened to a specific
34711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34718 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34719 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34726 \begin_layout Itemize
34727 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34728 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34733 \begin_inset space ~
34736 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34739 \begin_layout Subsection
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34759 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34762 ) or the toolbar button
34765 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34771 Advanced Find and Replace
34776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34786 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34790 \begin_inset space ~
34795 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34798 arg "paragraph-break"
34802 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34803 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34807 arg "paragraph-break"
34810 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34814 searches backwards.
34817 \begin_layout Standard
34821 \begin_inset space ~
34826 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34840 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34844 Searching for mathematics
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34848 Mathematical formulas, such as
34849 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34852 or something more complex like
34853 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34856 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34861 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34862 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34863 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34864 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34876 This is done by switching to the
34880 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34885 This way, entering in the
34892 \begin_layout Itemize
34893 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34894 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34897 \begin_layout Itemize
34898 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34899 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34902 \begin_layout Itemize
34903 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34904 of it only within section headings.
34905 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34906 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34910 \begin_layout Itemize
34911 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34912 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34915 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34919 \begin_layout Standard
34920 The entries made in the
34924 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34927 \begin_inset space ~
34933 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34937 button or alternatively press
34940 arg "paragraph-break"
34947 while the cursor is in the
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34958 \begin_layout Standard
34959 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34961 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34965 \begin_layout Itemize
34966 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34967 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34975 with its typewriter version
34976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34990 \begin_layout Itemize
34991 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34997 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35009 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35016 (you may want to enable the
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35032 options and disable the
35040 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35048 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35049 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35053 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35056 , or occurrences of
35057 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35061 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35067 \begin_layout Subsection
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35077 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35081 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35091 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35097 This is done with the context menu
35099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35100 Insert Regular Expression
35102 while the cursor is in the
35107 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35108 expression matching rules
35112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35113 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35120 \begin_inset space ~
35123 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35124 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35130 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35131 same text in the document.
35132 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35133 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35136 \begin_layout Enumerate
35137 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35142 editor the fraction
35143 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35147 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35150 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35151 fractions with the given denominator.
35154 \begin_layout Enumerate
35155 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35167 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35172 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35173 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35174 Also, by inserting a
35175 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35178 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35179 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35182 \begin_layout Standard
35183 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35184 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35185 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35188 , and referring back to them through
35189 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35193 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35197 For example, try searching with the regexp
35198 \begin_inset Newline newline
35201 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35204 \begin_inset Newline newline
35207 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35214 \begin_layout Standard
35215 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35223 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35224 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35225 sub-expressions is absolute.
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35231 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35234 always refers to the first occurrence of
35235 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35238 in all entered regexps.
35246 \begin_layout Section
35248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35250 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35255 \begin_inset Index idx
35258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35269 has a built-in spell checker.
35272 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35279 key or the toolbar button
35282 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35285 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35286 beginning of the currently selected text.
35287 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35288 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35289 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35290 scrolled so that it is visible.
35291 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35292 n, if any could be found.
35293 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35297 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35298 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35302 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35309 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35310 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35312 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35313 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35324 arg "dialog-show character"
35327 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35329 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35333 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35334 can be downloaded from here:
35335 \begin_inset Newline newline
35339 \begin_inset Flex URL
35342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35344 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35350 \begin_inset Newline newline
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35357 files for each language.
35358 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35359 \begin_inset space ~
35362 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35363 's installation subfolder
35371 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35373 \begin_inset Newline newline
35376 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35377 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35378 but in most cases these are
35394 is the language code.
35397 \begin_layout Subsection
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35404 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35405 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35410 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35413 you can set the following things:
35416 \begin_layout Description
35418 \begin_inset space ~
35421 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35422 should use for spell checking.
35423 Depending on your platform,
35437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35438 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35439 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35457 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35460 \begin_layout Description
35462 \begin_inset space ~
35465 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35466 will always use the given language
35467 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35470 \begin_layout Description
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35475 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35481 \begin_inset space \space{}
35485 This should normally not be needed.
35488 \begin_layout Description
35490 \begin_inset space ~
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35497 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35509 \begin_layout Description
35511 \begin_inset space ~
35514 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35515 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35516 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35517 appear in a context menu.
35518 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35522 \begin_layout Description
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35535 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35539 \begin_layout Section
35541 \begin_inset Index idx
35544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35553 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35562 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35563 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35573 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35575 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35585 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35587 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35588 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35589 which are available for many languages.
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35593 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35594 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35598 \begin_layout Subsection
35599 Setting up the thesaurus
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35611 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35615 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35620 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35634 For instance, the US English files are named:
35637 \begin_layout Itemize
35641 \begin_layout Itemize
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35654 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35655 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35659 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35660 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35667 ) to the path where they are installed.
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35672 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35673 ies, typical locations are
35679 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35683 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35687 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35690 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35696 LibreOffice-<Version>
35703 On the Mac, the default location is
35705 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35706 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35707 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35708 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35709 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35710 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35718 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35719 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35720 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35724 \begin_layout Standard
35725 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35726 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35730 \begin_layout Itemize
35731 \begin_inset Flex URL
35734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35736 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35744 \begin_layout Standard
35745 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35746 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35749 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35750 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35757 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35759 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35760 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35765 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35767 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35770 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35776 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35779 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35780 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35789 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35790 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35797 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35800 \begin_layout Subsection
35801 Using the thesaurus
35804 \begin_layout Standard
35805 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35807 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35810 or the toolbar button
35813 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35816 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35818 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35820 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35821 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35822 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35831 ), related terms (such as
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35843 ), compounds (such as
35846 \begin_inset space ~
35855 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35864 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35869 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35873 \begin_layout Standard
35874 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35875 the dictionary, such as the above
35879 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35884 \begin_inset space \space{}
35887 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35888 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35889 For example, looking up the word form
35893 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35898 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35903 \begin_inset space \space{}
35914 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35915 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35916 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35919 \begin_layout Section
35921 \begin_inset Index idx
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 \begin_inset Index idx
35934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35935 Document ! Change Tracking
35941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35943 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35950 \begin_layout Standard
35951 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35952 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35953 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35954 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35961 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_layout Standard
35972 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35986 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35987 You can change the color in
35989 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35990 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35996 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36007 \begin_inset Index idx
36010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36011 Color ! Change tracking
36016 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36017 's status bar when the
36018 cursor is in changed text.
36019 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36022 arg "changes-merge"
36028 \begin_layout Standard
36029 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36031 \begin_inset Index idx
36034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36044 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 \begin_inset Graphics
36052 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36060 \begin_layout Standard
36061 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36067 \begin_layout Standard
36068 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36071 \begin_layout Standard
36072 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36078 \begin_layout Standard
36079 \begin_inset Tabular
36080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36081 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36082 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36093 arg "changes-track"
36101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36112 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36114 \begin_inset space ~
36123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36132 arg "changes-output"
36140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36151 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 Jumps to the next change
36197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36206 arg "change-accept"
36214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 arg "change-reject"
36253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36264 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36284 arg "changes-merge"
36292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36303 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 arg "all-changes-accept"
36331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36342 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36366 arg "all-changes-reject"
36374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36385 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36424 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_layout Standard
36477 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36483 \begin_layout Standard
36484 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36505 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36506 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36507 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36508 the next change after the current cursor position.
36509 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36510 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36511 step to the next change.
36512 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36517 to describe a change.
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36527 \begin_inset Index idx
36530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36538 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36547 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36551 \begin_layout Section
36552 Comparison of Documents
36553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36555 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36560 \begin_inset Index idx
36563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36564 Comparison of documents
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36576 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36580 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36581 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36583 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36585 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36597 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36631 enables the change tracking option
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36647 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36650 \begin_layout Section
36651 International Support
36652 \begin_inset Index idx
36655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36656 International support
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36666 with any language you want.
36667 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36668 up \SpecialChar LyX
36670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36672 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36682 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36689 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36696 \begin_layout Subsection
36698 \begin_inset Index idx
36701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 \begin_inset Index idx
36711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 Document ! Settings
36718 \begin_inset Index idx
36721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36722 Document ! Language
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36734 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36737 dialog lets you set
36739 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36744 \begin_layout Standard
36749 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36759 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36760 For details about the different encoding options see section
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36767 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36774 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 Keyboard mapping configuration
36776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36778 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 If you have for example a U.
36787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36790 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36791 can use an alternate keymap.
36792 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36797 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36798 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36799 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36802 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36803 \begin_inset space ~
36807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36809 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36814 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36815 which one you want to use.
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36820 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36821 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36825 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36826 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36827 one to support the characters you want.
36828 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36835 \begin_layout Chapter
36838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36840 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36848 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36849 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36850 topic inside the user's guide.
36853 \begin_layout Section
36855 \begin_inset Index idx
36858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36867 \begin_layout Standard
36872 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36875 \begin_layout Subsection
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 Creates a new document.
36883 \begin_layout Subsection
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36888 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36889 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36890 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36893 \begin_layout Subsection
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36901 \begin_layout Subsection
36905 \begin_layout Standard
36906 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36907 Click there on a file to open it.
36910 \begin_layout Subsection
36914 \begin_layout Standard
36915 Closes the current document.
36918 \begin_layout Subsection
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36923 Closes all opened documents.
36926 \begin_layout Subsection
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36931 Saves the actual document.
36934 \begin_layout Subsection
36938 \begin_layout Standard
36939 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36942 \begin_layout Subsection
36946 \begin_layout Standard
36947 Saves all opened documents.
36950 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36955 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36958 \begin_layout Subsection
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36963 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36964 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36965 It is described in the section
36967 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36972 Additional Features
36977 \begin_layout Subsection
36981 \begin_layout Standard
36982 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36983 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36985 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36986 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36990 \begin_layout Standard
36991 When using the menu entry
36994 \begin_inset space ~
36999 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37016 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37017 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37020 \begin_layout Subsection
37022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37024 name "subsec:Export"
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 You can export your document to various file formats.
37033 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37035 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37036 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37037 during its configuration.
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37049 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37056 \begin_layout Description
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37065 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37070 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37071 \begin_inset Newline newline
37074 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37075 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37079 \begin_layout Description
37080 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37086 \begin_layout Description
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37091 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37097 \begin_layout Description
37098 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37099 's native DVI-format.
37100 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37101 files paths or file names in your document.
37103 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37110 \begin_layout Description
37111 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37112 in files paths or file names
37115 \begin_layout Description
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37124 ) DVI-format using the program
37126 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37129 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37141 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37149 \begin_layout Description
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37154 (cropped) the same as
37158 but with cropped page margins.
37161 \begin_layout Description
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37166 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37170 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37175 \begin_layout Description
37179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37187 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37195 \begin_layout Description
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37204 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37208 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37216 \begin_layout Description
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37229 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37230 source that is compilable with the program
37232 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37236 \begin_layout Description
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37245 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37246 source, additionally all images used in the document
37247 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37251 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37254 \begin_layout Description
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37263 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37264 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37265 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37273 \begin_layout Description
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37286 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37287 source that is compilable with the program
37293 \begin_layout Description
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset space ~
37306 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37307 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37313 \begin_layout Description
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37318 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37319 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37325 \begin_inset space \space{}
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37349 represent the version number)
37352 \begin_layout Description
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37361 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37362 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37363 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37367 \begin_layout Description
37368 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37369 's internal XHTML engine
37372 \begin_layout Description
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37389 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37394 For the conversion the program
37403 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37406 \begin_layout Description
37407 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37412 \begin_layout Description
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37417 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37419 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37422 For the conversion the program
37431 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37434 \begin_layout Description
37436 \begin_inset space ~
37439 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37440 For the conversion the program
37449 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37452 \begin_layout Description
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37457 (cropped) the same as
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37465 but with cropped page margins
37468 \begin_layout Description
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37477 PDF-format using the program
37481 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37484 \begin_layout Description
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37505 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37510 \begin_inset space \space{}
37513 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37517 \begin_layout Description
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37526 PDF-format using the program
37528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37531 , produces PDF-files directly
37534 \begin_layout Description
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37543 PDF-format using the program
37547 , produces PDF-files directly
37550 \begin_layout Description
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37559 PDF-format using the program
37563 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37566 \begin_layout Description
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37575 PDF-format using the program
37580 , produces PDF-files directly
37583 \begin_layout Description
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_layout Description
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37608 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37609 and then exported as text using the program
37614 \begin_layout Description
37619 PostScript format using the program
37627 options see section
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37634 reference "subsec:General-output"
37641 \begin_layout Description
37642 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37643 source and also code in the statistical programming
37657 it is possible to use
37661 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37665 \begin_layout Standard
37666 If one of the menu entries
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37682 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37684 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37697 \begin_inset Index idx
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37710 \begin_layout Subsection
37714 \begin_layout Standard
37715 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37716 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37725 reference "sec:Paths"
37730 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37739 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37740 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37741 's preferences as described in section
37742 \begin_inset space ~
37746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37748 reference "subsec:Converters"
37755 \begin_layout Subsection
37756 New and Close Window
37759 \begin_layout Standard
37760 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37764 \begin_layout Subsection
37768 \begin_layout Standard
37769 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37772 \begin_layout Section
37774 \begin_inset Index idx
37777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37786 \begin_layout Subsection
37790 \begin_layout Standard
37791 Described in section
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37798 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37805 \begin_layout Subsection
37806 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37809 \begin_layout Standard
37810 Described in section
37811 \begin_inset space ~
37815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37817 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37824 \begin_layout Subsection
37828 \begin_layout Standard
37829 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37830 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37833 \begin_layout Subsection
37837 \begin_layout Standard
37838 Selects the whole document.
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 Find & Replace (Quick)
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 Described in section
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37853 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37860 \begin_layout Subsection
37861 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37864 \begin_layout Standard
37865 Described in section
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37872 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37879 \begin_layout Subsection
37880 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37888 \begin_layout Subsection
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 Described in section
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37900 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37907 \begin_layout Subsection
37909 \begin_inset Index idx
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 Paragraph ! Settings
37921 \begin_layout Standard
37922 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37923 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37928 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37929 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37936 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_layout Subsection
37947 Table and Rows & Columns
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37951 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37952 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37953 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37956 \begin_layout Subsection
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37962 It will dissolve this inset.
37963 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37967 \begin_layout Subsection
37971 \begin_layout Standard
37972 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37973 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37976 \begin_layout Subsection
37977 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37980 \begin_layout Standard
37981 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37983 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37984 \begin_inset space ~
37988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37990 reference "sec:Nesting"
37995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37997 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38004 \begin_layout Subsection
38007 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38011 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38012 nts of the same type.
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38020 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38024 for an explanation.
38027 \begin_layout Section
38029 \begin_inset Index idx
38032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38041 \begin_layout Standard
38042 At the bottom of the
38046 menu the opened documents are listed.
38049 \begin_layout Subsection
38050 Open/Close all Insets
38053 \begin_layout Standard
38054 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38057 \begin_layout Subsection
38058 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38066 Math macros are described in the
38073 \begin_layout Subsection
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38085 reference "sec:Navigating"
38090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38092 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38099 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38112 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38119 \begin_layout Subsection
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 Opens a window showing console messages.
38125 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38130 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38131 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38132 is processing the document.
38135 \begin_layout Subsection
38137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38139 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38144 \begin_inset Index idx
38147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38156 \begin_layout Standard
38157 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38159 All toolbars and the
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38167 can be turned on and off.
38172 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38184 \begin_inset space ~
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38201 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38205 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38212 \begin_layout Standard
38217 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38221 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38222 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38223 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38224 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38225 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38228 \begin_layout Standard
38230 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38231 \begin_inset space ~
38235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38237 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38244 \begin_layout Subsection
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38252 \begin_inset space ~
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38272 \begin_inset space ~
38277 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38278 's main window vertically while
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38306 will split it horizontally.
38307 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38308 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38309 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38310 three or more documents at the same time.
38311 To close a split view, use the menu
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_layout Subsection
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38331 Closes a split view.
38334 \begin_layout Subsection
38338 \begin_layout Standard
38339 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38340 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38341 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38342 's main window fullscreen.
38343 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38344 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38347 \begin_layout Section
38349 \begin_inset Index idx
38352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38361 \begin_layout Subsection
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38366 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38367 \begin_inset space ~
38371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38373 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38384 \begin_layout Subsection
38386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38388 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38395 \begin_layout Standard
38396 Here you can insert the following characters:
38399 \begin_layout Description
38404 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38407 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38408 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38409 -packages you have installed.
38410 You can get a complete display by checking
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38419 \begin_inset Newline newline
38423 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 Not all characters will be visible in the
38435 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38436 dialog (see section
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38443 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38447 ) can display every character.
38455 \begin_layout Description
38456 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38460 \begin_layout Description
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38469 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38476 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38483 \begin_layout Description
38485 \begin_inset space ~
38488 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38492 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38498 \begin_layout Description
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38503 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38507 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38513 \begin_layout Description
38515 \begin_inset space ~
38518 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38522 \begin_layout Description
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38527 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38531 \begin_layout Description
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38536 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38542 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38548 \begin_layout Description
38550 \begin_inset space ~
38553 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38557 \begin_layout Description
38559 \begin_inset space ~
38563 \begin_inset Index idx
38566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38573 \begin_inset Index idx
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38577 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38582 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38583 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38585 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38591 \begin_inset Index idx
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 \begin_inset Newline newline
38605 More information about this feature can be found in the
38611 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38617 \begin_layout Description
38618 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38620 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38621 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38625 \begin_layout Subsection
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38630 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38633 \begin_layout Description
38634 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38635 \begin_inset script superscript
38637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 \begin_layout Description
38647 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38648 \begin_inset script subscript
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 \begin_layout Description
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38664 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38671 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38678 \begin_layout Description
38680 \begin_inset space ~
38683 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38684 \begin_inset space ~
38688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38690 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38697 \begin_layout Description
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38702 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38709 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38716 \begin_layout Description
38718 \begin_inset space ~
38721 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38727 \begin_inset space \space{}
38730 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38731 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38740 To insert a fraction use the command
38745 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38749 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38758 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38765 \begin_layout Description
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38770 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38777 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38784 \begin_layout Description
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38789 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38796 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38803 \begin_layout Description
38805 \begin_inset space ~
38808 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38809 \begin_inset space ~
38813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38815 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38822 \begin_layout Description
38823 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38830 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38837 \begin_layout Description
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38842 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38849 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38856 \begin_layout Description
38858 \begin_inset space ~
38861 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38868 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38875 \begin_layout Description
38877 \begin_inset space ~
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38884 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38893 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38900 for a usage example.
38903 \begin_layout Description
38905 \begin_inset space ~
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38912 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38913 \begin_inset space ~
38917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38919 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38926 \begin_layout Description
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38931 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38932 as described in section
38933 \begin_inset space ~
38937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38939 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38946 \begin_layout Description
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38951 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38958 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38965 \begin_layout Description
38967 \begin_inset space ~
38970 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38971 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38979 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38986 \begin_layout Description
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38991 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38998 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39005 \begin_layout Description
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39015 \begin_inset space ~
39019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39021 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39028 \begin_layout Subsection
39032 \begin_layout Standard
39033 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39037 \begin_inset space ~
39058 are described in section
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39065 reference "sec:toc"
39074 is described in section
39075 \begin_inset space ~
39079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39081 reference "sec:Index"
39089 is described in section
39090 \begin_inset space ~
39094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39096 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39102 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39105 is described in section
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39112 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39119 \begin_layout Subsection
39123 \begin_layout Standard
39124 To insert floats, as described in section
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39131 reference "sec:Floats"
39135 and in detail the chapter
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39150 \begin_layout Subsection
39154 \begin_layout Standard
39155 To insert notes, described in section
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39162 reference "sec:Notes"
39169 \begin_layout Subsection
39173 \begin_layout Standard
39174 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39176 Branches are described in section
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39183 reference "sec:Branches"
39190 \begin_layout Subsection
39194 \begin_layout Standard
39195 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39196 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39198 An example is the document class
39199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39206 with three custom insets.
39209 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39213 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39219 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39222 \begin_layout Subsection
39224 \begin_inset Index idx
39227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 \begin_layout Standard
39237 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39239 For more information see chapter
39241 External Document Parts
39244 \begin_inset space ~
39250 \begin_layout Subsection
39252 \begin_inset Index idx
39255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39265 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39266 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39273 \begin_inset space ~
39281 \begin_layout Subsection
39285 \begin_layout Standard
39290 dialog as described in section
39291 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39297 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39304 \begin_layout Subsection
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39313 as described in section
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39320 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39327 \begin_layout Subsection
39331 \begin_layout Standard
39336 as described in section
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39343 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39350 \begin_layout Subsection
39352 \begin_inset Index idx
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39362 \begin_inset Index idx
39365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39374 \begin_layout Standard
39375 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39376 Floats are described in section
39377 \begin_inset space ~
39381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39383 reference "sec:Floats"
39387 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39389 Multi-page Captions
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39402 \begin_layout Subsection
39406 \begin_layout Standard
39407 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39408 \begin_inset space ~
39412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39414 reference "sec:Index"
39421 \begin_layout Subsection
39425 \begin_layout Standard
39426 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39427 \begin_inset space ~
39431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39433 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39440 \begin_layout Subsection
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39446 Tables are described in section
39447 \begin_inset space ~
39451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39453 reference "sec:Tables"
39457 and in detail in the chapter
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39472 \begin_layout Subsection
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Graphics are described in section
39483 \begin_inset space ~
39487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39489 reference "sec:Graphics"
39496 \begin_layout Subsection
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39501 Inserts a URL as described in section
39502 \begin_inset space ~
39506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39508 reference "subsec:URLs"
39515 \begin_layout Subsection
39519 \begin_layout Standard
39520 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39527 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39534 \begin_layout Subsection
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39539 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39546 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39553 \begin_layout Subsection
39557 \begin_layout Standard
39558 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39565 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39572 \begin_layout Subsection
39576 \begin_layout Standard
39577 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39578 title or caption of a float.
39579 Inserts a short title as described in section
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39586 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39593 \begin_layout Subsection
39598 \begin_layout Standard
39599 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39600 Code box as described in section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39607 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39616 \begin_inset Index idx
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39628 \begin_layout Standard
39629 Inserts a program listings box.
39630 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39632 Program Code Listings
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39645 \begin_layout Subsection
39649 \begin_layout Standard
39650 Inserts the actual date.
39651 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39668 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39675 \begin_layout Section
39677 \begin_inset Index idx
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39694 of the current document.
39695 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39698 \begin_layout Subsection
39702 \begin_layout Standard
39703 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39704 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39705 to jump, for example, between section
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39710 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39714 2.5 and use the submenu
39717 \begin_inset space ~
39721 \begin_inset space ~
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39744 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39748 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39754 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39757 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39760 \begin_layout Standard
39761 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39770 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39773 \begin_inset space ~
39778 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39781 \begin_layout Subsection
39782 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39786 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39790 \begin_layout Subsection
39794 \begin_layout Standard
39795 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39796 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39797 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_layout Subsection
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39821 The \SpecialChar LyX
39822 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39837 manual for a detailed description.
39840 \begin_layout Section
39842 \begin_inset Index idx
39845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 \begin_layout Subsection
39858 \begin_layout Standard
39859 Change Tracking is described in section
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39866 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39873 \begin_layout Subsection
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39882 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39883 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39884 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39886 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39887 to the clipboard or update the view.
39888 \begin_inset Newline newline
39891 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39898 Open Containing Directory
39900 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39901 's temporary folder for the document.
39902 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39903 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39904 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39905 For example some journals require to send the
39909 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39913 \begin_layout Subsection
39914 Start Appendix Here
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39918 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39919 as described in section
39920 \begin_inset space ~
39924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39926 reference "sec:Appendices"
39933 \begin_layout Subsection
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39943 default output format for the document (menu
39945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39947 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39959 \begin_inset space ~
39963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39965 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39969 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39972 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39973 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39978 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39983 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_inset space ~
39995 \begin_inset space ~
39999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40001 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40005 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40006 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40008 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40019 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40034 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40035 when it is first configured.
40036 The default output format is
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_layout Subsection
40048 View (Other Formats)
40051 \begin_layout Standard
40052 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40053 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40054 actual document with an external program.
40055 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40056 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40057 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40059 All possible formats are listed in section
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40066 reference "subsec:Export"
40071 You should at least see the menu entry
40076 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40078 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40080 \begin_inset space ~
40084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40086 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40091 \begin_inset Index idx
40094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40104 \begin_layout Standard
40105 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40106 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40108 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40109 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40114 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40119 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40129 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40134 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40135 when it is first configured.
40138 \begin_layout Subsection
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40148 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40151 \begin_layout Subsection
40152 Update (Other Formats)
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40156 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40157 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40160 \begin_layout Subsection
40161 View Master Document
40164 \begin_layout Standard
40165 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40186 manual for more information on this topic).
40187 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40188 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40201 generates the output of the whole book, while
40205 will just output the chapter alone.
40208 \begin_layout Standard
40209 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40210 in the document settings (menu
40212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40214 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40232 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40236 ) or in the preferences (menu
40238 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40239 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40244 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40246 \begin_inset space ~
40249 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40267 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40274 \begin_layout Subsection
40275 Update Master Document
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40300 manual for more information on this topic).
40301 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40302 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40305 \begin_layout Standard
40306 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40307 in the document settings (menu
40309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40311 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40317 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40329 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40333 ) or in the preferences (menu
40335 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40336 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40341 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40346 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40364 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40371 \begin_layout Subsection
40373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40375 name "subsec:Compressed"
40382 \begin_layout Standard
40383 Un/compresses the current document.
40384 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40385 compression (see the
40387 Additional Features
40389 manual for details).
40392 \begin_layout Subsection
40396 \begin_layout Standard
40397 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40400 \begin_layout Subsection
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 The document settings are described in appendix
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40412 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40419 \begin_layout Section
40421 \begin_inset Index idx
40424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40433 \begin_layout Subsection
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 Spell checking is explained in section
40439 \begin_inset space ~
40443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40445 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40452 \begin_layout Subsection
40456 \begin_layout Standard
40457 The thesaurus is described in section
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40464 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40473 \begin_inset Index idx
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40483 \begin_inset Index idx
40486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40497 the highlighted document part.
40500 \begin_layout Subsection
40506 \begin_inset Index idx
40509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40510 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40519 \begin_layout Standard
40520 Generates with the help of the program
40522 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40525 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40526 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40527 This feature is not available on Windows.
40530 \begin_layout Subsection
40536 \begin_inset Index idx
40539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40550 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40560 to see the full filename paths.
40563 \begin_layout Subsection
40565 \begin_inset Index idx
40568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40577 \begin_layout Standard
40578 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40579 files as described in section
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40586 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40593 \begin_layout Subsection
40595 \begin_inset Index idx
40598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40611 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40629 \begin_inset Index idx
40632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40633 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40643 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40644 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40645 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40646 -packages and programs it needs; see
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40654 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40661 \begin_layout Subsection
40665 \begin_layout Standard
40670 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40677 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40684 \begin_layout Section
40686 \begin_inset Index idx
40689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40698 \begin_layout Standard
40699 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40700 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40702 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40706 \begin_layout Standard
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40715 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40716 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40717 packages and classes found
40718 by \SpecialChar LyX
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40726 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40733 \begin_layout Standard
40737 \begin_inset space ~
40742 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40747 \begin_layout Section
40749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40751 name "sec:Toolbars"
40758 \begin_layout Standard
40759 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40766 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40773 \begin_layout Standard
40774 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40775 This is described in the
40777 Additional Features
40782 \begin_layout Subsection
40784 \begin_inset Index idx
40787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40796 \begin_layout Standard
40797 \begin_inset Graphics
40798 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40813 \begin_layout Standard
40814 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40831 \begin_inset Note Note
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40835 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40840 manual for more information.
40848 \begin_layout Standard
40849 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40855 \begin_layout Standard
40856 \begin_inset Tabular
40857 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40858 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 \begin_inset Graphics
40867 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40881 pull-down box for the environments
40894 \begin_layout Standard
40895 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40901 \begin_layout Standard
40903 \begin_inset Tabular
40904 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40905 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40906 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40907 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40931 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40961 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40991 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41007 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41037 arg "spelling-continuously"
41045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41049 Spellcheck continuously
41055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41078 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41168 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41214 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41254 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41310 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41311 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41339 Emphasize text, function of the
41341 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41346 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41376 Set text to noun style, function of the
41378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41383 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 arg "textstyle-apply"
41409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 Format text using the current settings in the
41415 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41420 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41453 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41501 arg "tabular-insert"
41509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41531 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41543 Toggle outline window on/off,
41545 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41588 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41600 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41613 \begin_layout Subsection
41615 \begin_inset Index idx
41618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 \begin_layout Standard
41628 \begin_inset Graphics
41629 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41637 \begin_layout Standard
41638 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41644 \begin_layout Standard
41645 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41650 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41656 \begin_layout Standard
41657 \begin_inset Tabular
41658 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41659 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41660 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41661 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 arg "layout Enumerate"
41706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 arg "layout Itemize"
41733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 arg "layout Description"
41787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 arg "depth-increment"
41814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 arg "depth-decrement"
41852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41882 arg "float-insert figure"
41890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41897 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 arg "float-insert table"
41921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41928 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42068 arg "nomencl-insert"
42076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42102 arg "footnote-insert"
42110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42181 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42183 \begin_inset space ~
42192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42201 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42277 \begin_inset space ~
42286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42295 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42310 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42326 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42341 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 arg "dialog-show character"
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42377 \begin_inset space ~
42380 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 arg "layout-paragraph"
42404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42458 \begin_layout Subsection
42459 View/Update Toolbar
42460 \begin_inset Index idx
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 Toolbar ! View / Update
42472 \begin_layout Standard
42473 \begin_inset Graphics
42474 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42481 \begin_layout Standard
42482 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42488 \begin_layout Standard
42489 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42493 \begin_layout Standard
42494 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42500 \begin_layout Standard
42501 \begin_inset Tabular
42502 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42503 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42504 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42505 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42545 arg "buffer-update"
42553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 arg "master-buffer-view"
42583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42609 arg "master-buffer-update"
42617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42647 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42662 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42663 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42664 Synchronize with Output
42670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42694 View (Other Formats)
42700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42707 arg "update-others"
42715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42722 Update (Other Formats)
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42736 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42740 \begin_layout Subsection
42744 \begin_layout Standard
42745 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42752 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42756 , the table toolbar
42757 \begin_inset Index idx
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42774 manual and the math macro toolbar
42775 \begin_inset Index idx
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 \begin_layout Chapter
42792 The Document Settings
42793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42795 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42800 \begin_inset Index idx
42803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42804 Document ! Settings
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42821 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42822 is called with the menu
42824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42828 You can save your document settings as default with the
42830 Save as Document Defaults
42832 button in any dialog.
42833 This will create a template named
42837 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42838 when you create a new document without
42842 \begin_layout Standard
42847 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42848 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42851 \begin_layout Standard
42852 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42853 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42854 to find the one you are looking for.
42855 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42856 the submenus of the dialog.
42858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42862 \begin_inset space \space{}
42866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42873 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42874 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42875 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42878 \begin_layout Section
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42883 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42885 Document classes are described in section
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42892 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42900 \begin_layout Standard
42904 \begin_inset space ~
42909 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42914 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42915 as a layout for a document class.
42916 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42918 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 Some classes use special class options by default.
42929 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42933 and you can decide to use them or not.
42934 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42935 recommended you leave them untouched.
42940 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42941 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42946 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42948 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42954 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42955 \begin_inset Newline newline
42960 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42963 \begin_inset Newline newline
42966 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42967 distribution, see section
42972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42974 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42992 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42993 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42994 in the background if the child document
42995 is opened without its master.
42996 This way child documents are always compilable.
42997 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_layout Standard
43013 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43024 \begin_inset Index idx
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43029 packages ! prettyref
43035 \begin_inset Index idx
43038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43040 packages ! refstyle
43045 for cross-references, see section
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43052 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43059 \begin_layout Section
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43065 Please refer to the section
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43081 manual for details.
43084 \begin_layout Section
43088 \begin_layout Standard
43089 Modules are explained in section
43090 \begin_inset space ~
43094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43096 reference "subsec:Modules"
43103 \begin_layout Section
43107 \begin_layout Standard
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43115 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43122 \begin_layout Section
43126 \begin_layout Standard
43127 The document font settings are described in section
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43134 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43141 \begin_layout Section
43145 \begin_layout Standard
43146 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43163 and whether it should be a
43166 \begin_inset space ~
43171 can also be specified here.
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43176 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43177 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43179 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43182 \begin_layout Standard
43185 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43188 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43189 justifies the text on screen.
43190 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43194 \begin_layout Section
43198 \begin_layout Standard
43199 This dialog is described in sections
43200 \begin_inset space ~
43204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43206 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43213 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43220 \begin_layout Section
43224 \begin_layout Standard
43225 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43232 reference "subsec:Margins"
43239 \begin_layout Section
43241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43243 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43248 \begin_inset Index idx
43251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43252 Language ! Encoding
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43261 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43262 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43263 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43265 is always encoded in utf8).
43266 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43267 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43268 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43269 -command is not known for
43270 a particular character).
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 If you use the option
43279 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43280 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43281 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43283 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43284 exactly one encoding.
43285 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43290 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43291 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43292 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43293 installation supports Unicode), choose
43294 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43295 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43296 is quite incomplete, so
43297 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43302 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43303 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43304 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43305 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43306 -commands is not used, because all
43307 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43308 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43309 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43310 , two new alternative engines
43311 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43313 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43315 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43326 \begin_inset space ~
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43340 \begin_inset space ~
43344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43346 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43351 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43355 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43362 \begin_inset space ~
43367 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43368 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43378 The possible settings are:
43381 \begin_layout Description
43382 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43384 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43385 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43389 \begin_inset space ~
43393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43395 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43402 \begin_layout Description
43403 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43404 format you will use.
43405 In many cases this will be
43410 \begin_inset Index idx
43413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43421 If the newer package
43426 \begin_inset Index idx
43429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43431 packages ! polyglossia
43436 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43437 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43438 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43440 this package will be used instead of
43447 \begin_layout Description
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43460 would be more appropriate.
43463 \begin_layout Description
43464 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43465 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43469 (for German texts), type in
43472 \begin_inset Newline newline
43477 usepackage{ngerman}
43480 \begin_layout Description
43481 None will not use a language package.
43482 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43485 \begin_layout Standard
43486 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43489 \begin_layout Description
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43506 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43512 \begin_inset Index idx
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 packages ! inputenc
43523 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43524 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43525 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43529 \begin_layout Description
43530 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43532 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43533 commands, which may result in a big
43534 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43535 -commands are needed.
43538 \begin_layout Description
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43544 \begin_inset space ~
43547 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43550 \begin_layout Description
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43559 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43562 \begin_layout Description
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43567 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43570 \begin_layout Description
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_inset space ~
43579 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43580 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43583 \begin_layout Description
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43592 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43596 \begin_layout Description
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43605 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43606 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43609 \begin_layout Description
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43622 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43629 \begin_layout Description
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43639 \begin_inset space ~
43642 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43643 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43646 \begin_layout Description
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43652 \begin_inset space ~
43655 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43656 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43657 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43658 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_layout Description
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43678 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43679 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43680 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43682 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43687 \begin_inset space ~
43693 \begin_layout Description
43695 \begin_inset space ~
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43702 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43705 \begin_layout Description
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43714 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43717 \begin_layout Description
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43726 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43729 \begin_layout Description
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43734 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43737 \begin_layout Description
43739 \begin_inset space ~
43742 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43757 \begin_layout Description
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43769 \begin_layout Description
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43778 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43781 \begin_layout Description
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43793 \begin_layout Description
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43802 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43808 \begin_inset Index idx
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43818 , when using this, set the document language to
43823 \begin_layout Description
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43832 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43837 , when using this, set the document language to
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_layout Description
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43852 \begin_inset space ~
43855 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43861 \begin_inset Index idx
43864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43866 packages ! japanese
43871 , when using this, set the document language to
43876 \begin_layout Description
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43885 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43890 , when using this, set the document language to
43895 \begin_layout Description
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43909 , when using this, set the document language to
43914 \begin_layout Description
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43919 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43922 \begin_layout Description
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43935 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43938 \begin_layout Description
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43951 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43952 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43953 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43956 \begin_layout Description
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43977 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43978 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43981 \begin_layout Description
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43996 \begin_inset Index idx
43999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44006 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44009 \begin_layout Description
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44022 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44029 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44032 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44039 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44040 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44042 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44054 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44060 \begin_inset Index idx
44063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44070 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44073 \begin_layout Description
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44078 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44084 \begin_inset Index idx
44087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44089 packages ! inputenc
44095 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44099 \begin_layout Description
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44112 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44119 \begin_layout Description
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44129 \begin_inset space ~
44132 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44133 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44134 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44138 \begin_layout Description
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44151 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44152 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44155 \begin_layout Section
44157 \begin_inset Index idx
44160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44167 \begin_inset Index idx
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 \begin_inset Index idx
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 Color ! Shaded boxes
44187 \begin_inset Index idx
44190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44191 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 Here you can alter the font color for the
44204 (default: black), for
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44212 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44216 (default: white) and for
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44229 sets the color back to the default.
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44233 Clicking any button showing
44241 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44242 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44243 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44244 later more quickly.
44247 \begin_layout Standard
44248 Note, if you change the
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44256 font color and use the option
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44264 in the document settings under
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44272 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44279 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44286 \begin_layout Standard
44287 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44293 \begin_layout Standard
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44306 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44309 \begin_inset space ~
44312 Code after a forced page break:
44315 \begin_layout Itemize
44316 For the page color:
44317 \begin_inset Newline newline
44324 pagecolor{color name}
44327 \begin_layout Itemize
44328 For the text color:
44329 \begin_inset Newline newline
44339 \begin_layout Standard
44340 You are restricted to one of
44376 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset Newline newline
44392 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44393 names to refer to them:
44396 \begin_layout Itemize
44402 \begin_inset Newline newline
44407 page_backgroundcolor
44410 \begin_layout Itemize
44414 \begin_inset space ~
44420 \begin_inset Newline newline
44428 \begin_layout Itemize
44432 \begin_inset space ~
44438 \begin_inset Newline newline
44446 \begin_layout Itemize
44450 \begin_inset space ~
44456 \begin_inset Newline newline
44464 \begin_layout Standard
44465 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44484 \begin_layout Section
44488 \begin_layout Standard
44489 Here you can adjust the
44493 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44497 as described in section
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44504 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44511 \begin_layout Section
44515 \begin_layout Standard
44516 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44522 \begin_inset Index idx
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44527 packages ! biblatex
44537 \begin_inset Index idx
44540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44552 \begin_inset Index idx
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44563 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44566 Sectioned bibliography
44568 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44574 \begin_inset Index idx
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 packages ! bibtopic
44589 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44590 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44594 for the generation of the bibliography.
44595 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44602 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44609 \begin_layout Section
44613 \begin_layout Standard
44614 Here you can define the
44618 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44626 reference "sec:Index"
44633 \begin_layout Section
44637 \begin_layout Standard
44638 The PDF properties are explained in section
44639 \begin_inset space ~
44643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44645 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44652 \begin_layout Section
44656 \begin_layout Standard
44657 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44658 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44664 \begin_inset Index idx
44667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 \begin_inset Index idx
44682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44694 \begin_inset Index idx
44697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 \begin_inset Index idx
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 \begin_inset Index idx
44727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 packages ! mathdots
44739 \begin_inset Index idx
44742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44744 packages ! mathtools
44754 \begin_inset Index idx
44757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44769 \begin_inset Index idx
44772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 packages ! stackrel
44784 \begin_inset Index idx
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44789 packages ! stmaryrd
44799 \begin_inset Index idx
44802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 packages ! undertilde
44809 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44812 \begin_layout Description
44813 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44814 -errors in formulas,
44815 ensure that you have this enabled.
44818 \begin_layout Description
44819 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44820 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44821 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44825 \begin_layout Description
44826 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44829 \begin_inset space ~
44841 \begin_layout Description
44842 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44857 \begin_layout Description
44858 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44869 \begin_layout Description
44870 mathtools is used for the math commands
44906 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44913 \begin_layout Description
44914 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44916 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44925 \begin_layout Description
44926 stackrel is used for the math command
44943 \begin_layout Description
44944 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44947 \begin_layout Description
44948 undertilde is used for the math command
44956 Accents for one Character
44965 \begin_layout Section
44969 \begin_layout Standard
44970 The float placement options are described in the section
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_layout Section
44993 \begin_layout Standard
44994 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44996 Program Code Listings
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45009 \begin_layout Section
45013 \begin_layout Standard
45014 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45022 set to be used and set the
45027 The itemize environment is described in section
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45034 reference "sec:Itemize"
45041 \begin_layout Standard
45042 You can furthermore specify a
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45050 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45051 command of the desired character.
45052 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45059 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45065 \begin_inset space \space{}
45069 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45079 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45080 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45083 \begin_layout Standard
45084 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45092 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45093 -packages in the preamble (menu
45096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45106 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45110 usepackage{textcomp}
45113 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45117 usepackage{amssymb}
45127 \begin_layout Section
45131 \begin_layout Standard
45132 Branches are described in section
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45139 reference "sec:Branches"
45146 \begin_layout Section
45148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45150 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45157 \begin_layout Standard
45158 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45161 \begin_layout Description
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45170 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45190 View Master Document
45191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45198 Update Master Document
45199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45206 menu or the toolbar.
45207 The default is set in
45209 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45210 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45212 \begin_inset space ~
45215 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45225 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45232 \begin_layout Description
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45238 \begin_inset space ~
45241 Output settings for the menu
45243 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45251 For a detailed description see section
45253 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45266 \begin_layout Description
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45275 Options offers settings for the export format
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45288 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45292 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45301 settings are described in detail in section
45303 Math Output in XHTML
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45326 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45336 Save transient properties
45338 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45339 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45340 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45344 \begin_layout Itemize
45345 the activation of change tracking
45348 \begin_layout Itemize
45349 the output of tracked changes
45352 \begin_layout Itemize
45353 the recording of the document directory path.
45356 \begin_layout Standard
45357 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45358 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45362 \begin_layout Section
45370 \begin_layout Standard
45371 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45373 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45375 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45377 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45381 \begin_layout Standard
45382 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45383 -syntax is given in section
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45390 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45397 \begin_layout Chapter
45403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45405 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45410 \begin_inset Index idx
45413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45422 \begin_layout Standard
45423 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45429 It has the following submenus.
45432 \begin_layout Section
45436 \begin_layout Subsection
45440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45441 User Interface File
45442 \begin_inset Index idx
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45446 Customization ! of toolbars
45452 \begin_inset Index idx
45455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45456 Customization ! of menus
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45465 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45466 interface (ui) file.
45467 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45475 \begin_layout Description
45480 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45483 \begin_layout Description
45490 the menu entries in popup context menus
45493 \begin_layout Description
45498 specifies the toolbar buttons
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45502 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45503 and edit the entries.
45506 \begin_layout Standard
45507 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45519 entries must be finished with an explicit
45544 and in the case of the
45545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45557 The syntax for the entries is:
45560 \begin_layout Standard
45561 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45590 \begin_layout Standard
45592 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45595 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45596 -functions are listed in the menu
45598 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45600 \begin_inset space ~
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45609 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45615 \begin_layout Standard
45616 For example, assuming you use the menu
45618 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45621 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45625 \begin_layout Standard
45626 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45650 \begin_layout Standard
45652 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45667 to have the sixth bookmark.
45670 \begin_layout Standard
45674 \begin_inset space ~
45679 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45680 's toolbar buttons.
45681 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45685 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45697 \begin_layout Standard
45700 Enable tool tips in main work area
45702 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45710 \begin_layout Standard
45715 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45716 should display in the menu
45718 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45720 \begin_inset space ~
45728 \begin_layout Subsection
45732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45739 Restore window layouts and geometries
45742 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45743 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45750 Restore cursor positions
45752 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45756 \begin_layout Standard
45759 Load opened files from last session
45761 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45768 Clear all session information
45770 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45771 sessions (cursor positions, names
45772 of last opened documents, etc.).
45775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45779 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45784 \begin_inset Index idx
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 \begin_layout Standard
45799 Backup original documents when saving
45801 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45802 it was saved the last time.
45803 It is stored in the
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45812 \begin_inset space ~
45816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45818 reference "sec:Paths"
45822 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45825 \begin_inset space ~
45831 The backup file has the file extension
45832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45849 Backup documents, every
45851 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45854 \begin_layout Standard
45857 Save documents compressed by default
45859 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45866 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45871 This applies to newly created documents only.
45872 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45876 Windows & work area
45879 \begin_layout Standard
45882 Open documents in tabs
45884 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45893 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45906 reference "sec:Paths"
45910 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45917 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45918 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45919 of \SpecialChar LyX
45921 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45922 instance is created for each file.
45925 \begin_layout Standard
45928 Single close-tab button
45930 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45940 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45941 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45942 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45946 \begin_layout Standard
45947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45956 before the change takes effect.
45964 \begin_layout Standard
45969 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45971 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45973 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45977 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45978 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45979 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45982 \begin_layout Subsection
45984 \begin_inset Index idx
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45996 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46003 \begin_layout Standard
46004 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46008 \begin_layout Standard
46009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 This section only deals with the fonts
46021 the \SpecialChar LyX
46023 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46027 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46038 \begin_layout Standard
46039 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46056 (depends on the system) as its
46059 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_layout Standard
46076 You can change the font size with the
46083 \begin_layout Standard
46088 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46093 points have the size of 1
46094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46104 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46109 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46114 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46115 \begin_inset space ~
46119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46121 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46128 \begin_layout Standard
46131 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46133 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46134 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46135 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46136 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46137 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46139 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46146 \begin_layout Subsection
46148 \begin_inset Index idx
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46152 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46159 \begin_inset Index idx
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_layout Standard
46172 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46173 by choosing an item in the
46174 list and selecting the
46181 \begin_layout Standard
46182 By checking the option
46186 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46189 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46199 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46202 \begin_layout Subsection
46204 \begin_inset Index idx
46207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46216 \begin_layout Standard
46217 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46221 \begin_layout Standard
46226 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46227 This feature is described in section
46228 \begin_inset space ~
46232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46234 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46241 \begin_layout Standard
46242 Checking the option
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46258 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46261 \begin_layout Section
46263 \begin_inset Index idx
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 \begin_layout Subsection
46279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46283 \begin_layout Standard
46286 Cursor follows scrollbar
46288 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46292 \begin_layout Standard
46293 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46294 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46295 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46298 \begin_layout Standard
46301 Scroll below end of document
46303 is self-explanatory.
46306 \begin_layout Standard
46307 In \SpecialChar LyX
46308 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46315 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46317 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46318 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46321 \begin_layout Standard
46324 Sort environments alphabetically
46326 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46329 \begin_layout Standard
46332 Group environments by their category
46334 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46337 \begin_layout Standard
46342 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46357 \begin_layout Standard
46358 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46363 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46364 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46368 \begin_layout Subsection
46370 \begin_inset Index idx
46373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 \begin_inset Index idx
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 Settings ! Shortcuts
46392 \begin_layout Standard
46397 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46399 Several binding files are available, among them:
46402 \begin_layout Description
46403 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46406 \begin_layout Description
46407 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46419 \begin_layout Description
46420 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46431 \begin_layout Standard
46432 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46437 , and binding files for special languages.
46438 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46443 \begin_inset space \space{}
46447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46455 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46456 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46457 will try to use the appropriate binding
46461 \begin_layout Standard
46462 Some binding files, like
46466 , only have a limited scope.
46467 When looking at the end of the file
46471 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46474 \begin_layout Standard
46478 \begin_inset space ~
46482 \begin_inset space ~
46487 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46488 in the selected key binding file.
46491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46495 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46500 \begin_inset Index idx
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 Key Bindings ! Editing
46512 \begin_layout Standard
46513 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46514 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46515 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46516 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46519 Show key-bindings containing
46522 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46523 Insert there for example as keyword
46524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46531 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46532 functions that contain
46533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46541 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46542 All \SpecialChar LyX
46543 functions are also listed in the file
46548 that you will find in the
46555 \begin_layout Standard
46556 For example, to add the shortcut
46564 , select the function and press the
46569 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46570 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46573 \begin_layout Standard
46574 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46575 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46577 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46578 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46580 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46586 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46590 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46592 The syntax of the entries is:
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46620 \begin_layout Standard
46621 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46622 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46650 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46651 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46652 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46653 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46655 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46659 , you needed to specify it as
46664 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46667 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46670 \begin_layout Subsection
46672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46674 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46679 \begin_inset Index idx
46682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46689 \begin_inset Index idx
46692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46693 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46701 \begin_layout Standard
46702 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46703 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46704 provides keyboard maps.
46705 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46706 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46709 \begin_inset space ~
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46718 and select the keyboard map file named
46725 \begin_layout Standard
46734 keyboard map and, if you use the
46738 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46741 arg "keymap-primary"
46747 arg "keymap-secondary"
46750 respectively or toggle between them with
46753 arg "keymap-toggle"
46759 \begin_layout Standard
46760 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46768 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46777 \begin_layout Standard
46778 You can also specify the mouse
46780 Wheel scrolling speed
46783 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46787 Middle mouse button pasting
46789 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46790 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46793 \begin_layout Standard
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46810 you can select a key for zooming.
46811 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46814 \begin_layout Subsection
46818 \begin_layout Standard
46819 Input completion is described in section
46820 \begin_inset space ~
46824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46826 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46833 \begin_layout Section
46835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46842 \begin_inset Index idx
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 \begin_inset Index idx
46855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 \begin_layout Standard
46865 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46866 are normally determined during
46868 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46871 \begin_layout Description
46873 \begin_inset space ~
46876 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46877 's working directory.
46878 It is the default when you
46889 \begin_inset space ~
46897 \begin_layout Description
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46902 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46904 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46906 \begin_inset space ~
46910 \begin_inset space ~
46918 \begin_layout Description
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46923 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46929 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46933 \begin_inset Newline newline
46937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46949 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46950 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46958 \begin_layout Description
46960 \begin_inset space ~
46964 \begin_inset Index idx
46967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46974 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46981 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46989 will be used to save the backups.
46990 \begin_inset Newline newline
46993 Backup files have the ending
46994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47004 \begin_layout Description
47006 \begin_inset space ~
47009 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47010 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47012 \begin_inset Newline newline
47019 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47025 You can edit this file with the program
47034 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47035 in its preferences under
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47044 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47049 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47051 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47052 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47058 and \SpecialChar LyX
47059 need to be running the same time.
47060 \begin_inset Newline newline
47063 The pipe is also used for the
47067 feature, see section
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47074 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47079 \begin_inset Newline newline
47082 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47083 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47084 \begin_inset Newline newline
47100 \begin_layout Description
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47105 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47113 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47114 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47115 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47118 \begin_layout Description
47120 \begin_inset space ~
47123 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47129 You only need to specify it if you are using
47133 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47135 For \SpecialChar LyX
47140 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47144 \begin_layout Description
47146 \begin_inset space ~
47149 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47150 When \SpecialChar LyX
47151 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47152 to find it on the system.
47153 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47155 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47164 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47165 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47168 \begin_layout Description
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47173 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47174 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47175 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47176 code or in the document
47178 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47180 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47181 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47182 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47183 scanned for the input files.
47184 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47185 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47187 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47188 compilation may fail for some documents.
47191 \begin_layout Section
47195 \begin_layout Standard
47196 Here you can insert your
47205 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47207 \begin_inset space ~
47211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47213 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47217 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47220 \begin_layout Section
47222 \begin_inset Index idx
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47226 Language ! Settings
47232 \begin_inset Index idx
47235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47236 Settings ! Language
47244 \begin_layout Subsection
47246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47248 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47255 \begin_layout Description
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47264 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47266 You can find its actual translation status here:
47267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47269 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47277 \begin_layout Description
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47282 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47283 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47284 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47285 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47302 The most widespread language package is
47307 \begin_inset Index idx
47310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47317 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47319 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47320 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47321 come with the alternative
47327 \begin_inset Index idx
47330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47332 packages ! polyglossia
47337 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47338 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47344 The available selections are described in section
47345 \begin_inset space ~
47349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47351 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47358 \begin_layout Description
47360 \begin_inset space ~
47363 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47364 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47365 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47366 An example is the start command
47372 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47374 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47394 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47399 \begin_layout Description
47401 \begin_inset space ~
47409 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47410 command toggles the package on and off.
47413 \begin_layout Description
47415 \begin_inset space ~
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47422 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47426 \begin_layout Description
47428 \begin_inset space ~
47432 \begin_inset space ~
47435 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47439 \begin_layout Description
47441 \begin_inset space ~
47445 \begin_inset space ~
47448 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47449 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47450 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47452 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47459 \begin_layout Description
47461 \begin_inset space ~
47464 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47466 When this option is not set, the
47469 \begin_inset space ~
47474 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47476 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47487 \begin_layout Description
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47495 \begin_inset space ~
47501 When it is not set, the
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47509 is set to the end of the document.
47512 \begin_layout Description
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47521 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47522 language will be underlined in blue.
47525 \begin_layout Description
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47534 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47535 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47538 \begin_layout Description
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47543 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47544 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47545 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47546 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47549 \begin_layout Subsection
47553 \begin_layout Standard
47554 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47561 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47568 \begin_layout Section
47572 \begin_layout Subsection
47574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47576 name "subsec:General-output"
47583 \begin_layout Description
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47588 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47590 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47598 For a detailed description see section
47600 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47605 \begin_inset space ~
47613 \begin_layout Description
47615 \begin_inset space ~
47618 Options Options for the program
47622 that is used for the export format
47627 \begin_inset space ~
47631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47633 reference "subsec:Export"
47638 Possible options are listed in the
47643 \begin_inset Newline newline
47647 \begin_inset Flex URL
47650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47652 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47662 \begin_layout Description
47664 \begin_inset space ~
47668 \begin_inset space ~
47671 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47674 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47675 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47683 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47686 \begin_layout Description
47688 \begin_inset space ~
47692 \begin_inset Index idx
47695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47702 \begin_inset Index idx
47705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47706 Settings ! Date format
47711 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47712 \begin_inset Newline newline
47716 \begin_inset Flex URL
47719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47721 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47727 \begin_inset Newline newline
47730 For example the format
47731 \begin_inset Newline newline
47735 \begin_inset Newline newline
47738 prints the date as day/month/year.
47741 \begin_layout Description
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47747 \begin_inset space ~
47750 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47751 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47754 \begin_layout Subsection
47760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47762 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47767 \begin_inset Index idx
47770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47771 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47780 \begin_layout Description
47782 \begin_inset space ~
47790 \begin_inset space ~
47794 \begin_inset space ~
47797 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47802 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47823 are used for Cyrillic.
47824 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47837 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47839 sets up in the background.
47840 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47843 \begin_layout Description
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \begin_inset space ~
47860 options They only have an effect when the program
47864 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47869 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47870 manuals of the applications.
47873 \begin_layout Description
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47878 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47885 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47892 \begin_layout Description
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47898 \begin_inset space ~
47902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47904 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47911 \begin_layout Description
47913 \begin_inset space ~
47916 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47923 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47930 \begin_layout Description
47936 \begin_inset space ~
47939 command Command for the program
47941 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47944 that is described in the section
47946 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47951 Additional Features
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47957 There are additionally the following options:
47960 \begin_layout Description
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47970 \begin_inset space ~
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47979 \begin_inset space ~
47982 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48000 to separate folders.
48001 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48003 \begin_inset Index idx
48006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48013 \begin_inset Index idx
48016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48025 \begin_layout Description
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48031 \begin_inset space ~
48035 \begin_inset space ~
48039 \begin_inset space ~
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48050 changes Removes all manually set
48056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48064 dialog when changing the document class.
48067 \begin_layout Section
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48073 \begin_inset Index idx
48076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48085 \begin_layout Subsection
48087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48089 name "subsec:Converters"
48094 \begin_inset Index idx
48097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48106 \begin_layout Standard
48107 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48108 from one format to another.
48109 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48110 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48122 field and press the
48127 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48131 \begin_inset space ~
48136 drop-down list, modify the
48140 field and press the
48147 \begin_layout Standard
48150 Converter File Cache
48156 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48158 Maximum Age (in days
48161 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48162 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48165 \begin_layout Standard
48166 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48167 definition, is described in the section
48178 \begin_layout Subsection
48180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48182 name "sec:File-Formats"
48187 \begin_inset Index idx
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48197 \begin_inset Index idx
48200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48209 \begin_layout Standard
48210 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48220 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48223 \begin_layout Standard
48224 You can also define the
48226 Default output format
48228 that is used when you use
48230 View, Update, View Master Document
48234 Update Master Document
48240 menu or the toolbar.
48243 \begin_layout Standard
48244 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48255 \begin_layout Standard
48256 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48258 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48259 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48260 This is done by specifying a
48265 More about this is described in the section
48276 \begin_layout Chapter
48277 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48279 \begin_inset Index idx
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48291 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48298 \begin_layout Standard
48300 \begin_inset space ~
48304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48306 reference "tab:Units"
48310 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48311 and used in this documentation.
48314 \begin_layout Standard
48315 \begin_inset Float table
48321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48340 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48348 \begin_inset Tabular
48349 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48350 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48352 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48506 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48777 scaled point (65536
48778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48845 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48969 % of original image width
48974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49058 \begin_layout Chapter
49060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49062 name "chap:Credits"
49069 \begin_layout Standard
49070 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49071 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49074 \begin_layout Itemize
49077 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49080 \begin_layout Itemize
49086 \begin_layout Itemize
49092 \begin_layout Itemize
49098 \begin_layout Itemize
49104 \begin_layout Itemize
49110 \begin_layout Itemize
49116 \begin_layout Itemize
49122 \begin_layout Itemize
49125 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49128 \begin_layout Itemize
49134 \begin_layout Itemize
49140 \begin_layout Itemize
49146 \begin_layout Itemize
49152 \begin_layout Itemize
49158 \begin_layout Itemize
49164 \begin_layout Itemize
49170 \begin_layout Itemize
49176 \begin_layout Itemize
49177 The \SpecialChar LyX
49179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49189 \begin_layout Standard
49190 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49193 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49200 \begin_layout Bibliography
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49202 LatexCommand bibitem
49209 The \SpecialChar LyX
49211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49214 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49220 \begin_inset Newline newline
49224 \begin_inset Flex URL
49227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49229 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49237 \begin_layout Bibliography
49238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49239 LatexCommand bibitem
49240 key "latexcompanion"
49245 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49247 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49248 Companion Second Edition.
49251 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49254 \begin_layout Bibliography
49255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49256 LatexCommand bibitem
49262 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49265 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49269 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49272 \begin_layout Bibliography
49273 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49274 LatexCommand bibitem
49283 : A Document Preparation System.
49286 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49289 \begin_layout Bibliography
49290 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49291 LatexCommand bibitem
49301 The \SpecialChar TeX
49305 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49308 \begin_layout Bibliography
49309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49310 LatexCommand bibitem
49316 The \SpecialChar TeX
49318 \begin_inset Newline newline
49322 \begin_inset Flex URL
49325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49327 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49335 \begin_layout Bibliography
49336 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49337 LatexCommand bibitem
49343 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49345 \begin_inset Newline newline
49349 \begin_inset Flex URL
49352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49354 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49362 \begin_layout Bibliography
49363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49364 LatexCommand bibitem
49371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49373 name "Documentation"
49374 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49381 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49385 \begin_inset Newline newline
49389 \begin_inset Flex URL
49392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49394 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49402 \begin_layout Bibliography
49403 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49404 LatexCommand bibitem
49411 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49413 name "Documentation"
49414 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49419 how to use the program
49421 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49425 \begin_inset Newline newline
49429 \begin_inset Flex URL
49432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49434 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49442 \begin_layout Bibliography
49443 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49444 LatexCommand bibitem
49451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49453 name "Documentation"
49454 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49459 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49465 \begin_inset Index idx
49468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49470 packages ! biblatex
49476 \begin_inset Newline newline
49480 \begin_inset Flex URL
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49485 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49493 \begin_layout Bibliography
49494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49495 LatexCommand bibitem
49502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49504 name "Documentation"
49505 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49510 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49516 \begin_inset Index idx
49519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49527 \begin_inset Newline newline
49531 \begin_inset Flex URL
49534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49536 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49544 \begin_layout Bibliography
49545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49546 LatexCommand bibitem
49553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49555 name "Documentation"
49556 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49566 \begin_inset Newline newline
49570 \begin_inset Flex URL
49573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49575 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49583 \begin_layout Bibliography
49584 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49585 LatexCommand bibitem
49586 key "makeindex-man"
49592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49595 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49605 \begin_inset Newline newline
49609 \begin_inset Flex URL
49612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49614 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49622 \begin_layout Bibliography
49623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49624 LatexCommand bibitem
49631 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49633 name "Documentation"
49634 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49644 \begin_inset Newline newline
49648 \begin_inset Flex URL
49651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49653 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49661 \begin_layout Bibliography
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49663 LatexCommand bibitem
49670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49672 name "Documentation"
49673 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49678 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49680 \begin_inset Newline newline
49684 \begin_inset Flex URL
49687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49689 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49697 \begin_layout Bibliography
49698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49699 LatexCommand bibitem
49706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49708 name "Documentation"
49709 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49714 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49720 \begin_inset Index idx
49723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49731 \begin_inset Newline newline
49735 \begin_inset Flex URL
49738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49740 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49748 \begin_layout Bibliography
49749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49750 LatexCommand bibitem
49757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49759 name "Documentation"
49760 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49765 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49771 \begin_inset Index idx
49774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49776 packages ! enumitem
49782 \begin_inset Newline newline
49786 \begin_inset Flex URL
49789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49791 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49799 \begin_layout Bibliography
49800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49801 LatexCommand bibitem
49808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49810 name "Documentation"
49811 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49816 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49822 \begin_inset Index idx
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49827 packages ! fancyhdr
49833 \begin_inset Newline newline
49837 \begin_inset Flex URL
49840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49842 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49850 \begin_layout Bibliography
49851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49852 LatexCommand bibitem
49859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49861 name "Documentation"
49862 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49867 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49873 \begin_inset Index idx
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49878 packages ! hyperref
49884 \begin_inset Newline newline
49888 \begin_inset Flex URL
49891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49901 \begin_layout Bibliography
49902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49903 LatexCommand bibitem
49910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49912 name "Documentation"
49913 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49918 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49924 \begin_inset Index idx
49927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49929 packages ! microtpye
49935 \begin_inset Newline newline
49939 \begin_inset Flex URL
49942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49944 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49952 \begin_layout Bibliography
49953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49954 LatexCommand bibitem
49961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49963 name "Documentation"
49964 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49969 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49975 \begin_inset Index idx
49978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49986 \begin_inset Newline newline
49990 \begin_inset Flex URL
49993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49995 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50003 \begin_layout Bibliography
50004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50005 LatexCommand bibitem
50012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50014 name "Documentation"
50015 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50020 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50026 \begin_inset Index idx
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50031 packages ! prettyref
50037 \begin_inset Newline newline
50041 \begin_inset Flex URL
50044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50046 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50054 \begin_layout Bibliography
50055 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50056 LatexCommand bibitem
50063 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50065 name "Documentation"
50066 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50071 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50077 \begin_inset Index idx
50080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50082 packages ! refstyle
50088 \begin_inset Newline newline
50092 \begin_inset Flex URL
50095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50097 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50105 \begin_layout Bibliography
50106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50107 LatexCommand bibitem
50114 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50117 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50122 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50124 \begin_inset Newline newline
50128 \begin_inset Flex URL
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50133 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50141 \begin_layout Bibliography
50142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50143 LatexCommand bibitem
50150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50153 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50158 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50160 \begin_inset Newline newline
50164 \begin_inset Flex URL
50167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50169 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50177 \begin_layout Bibliography
50178 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50179 LatexCommand bibitem
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50189 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50194 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50195 for Cyrillic languages:
50196 \begin_inset Newline newline
50200 \begin_inset Flex URL
50203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50205 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50213 \begin_layout Bibliography
50214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50215 LatexCommand bibitem
50222 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50225 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50230 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50232 \begin_inset Newline newline
50236 \begin_inset Flex URL
50239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50241 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50249 \begin_layout Bibliography
50250 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50251 LatexCommand bibitem
50258 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50261 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50266 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50268 \begin_inset Newline newline
50272 \begin_inset Flex URL
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50277 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50285 \begin_layout Bibliography
50286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50287 LatexCommand bibitem
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50297 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50302 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50304 \begin_inset Newline newline
50308 \begin_inset Flex URL
50311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50313 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50321 \begin_layout Standard
50322 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50356 \begin_inset Note Note
50359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50366 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50367 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50368 bibliography is the second one:
50376 \begin_layout Standard
50377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50378 LatexCommand bibtex
50379 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50380 options "biblio/alphadin"
50387 \begin_layout Standard
50388 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50392 \begin_layout Standard
50396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50402 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50411 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50419 \begin_inset Note Note
50422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50423 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50424 \begin_inset space ~
50428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50430 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50442 \begin_layout Standard
50443 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50444 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50450 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50451 LatexCommand printindex